Home

Model 5014i - User Manual

1. Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 1 0 J5 1 Power Fail Relay N C Contact 2 Digital Ground 3 TTL Input 1 4 TTL Input 2 5 Digital Ground 6 TTL Input 5 7 TTL Input 7 8 TTL Input 8 9 TTL Input 10 10 Ground 11 TTL Input 13 12 TTL Input 15 13 Digital Ground 14 Analog Voltage 1 15 Analog Voltage 3 16 Analog Ground 17 Analog Voltage 5 18 Analog Ground 19 Analog Ground 20 Power Fail Relay COM 21 Power Fail Relay N O Contact 22 Digital Ground 23 TTL Input 3 24 TTL Input 4 25 TTL Input 6 26 Digital Ground 27 TTL Input 9 28 TTL Input 11 29 TTL Input 12 30 TTL Input 14 31 TTL Input 16 32 Digital Ground 33 Analog Voltage 2 34 Analog Voltage 4 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 35 Analog Ground 36 Analog Voltage 6 37 Analog Ground VOLTAGE TEST J6 1 5V 2 3 3V 15V 15V SER EN J7 1 Serial Enable Jumper 2 3 3V 24V IN J10 1 24V 2 Ground RESET PROC J12 1 Reset Proc 2 Ground DIGITAL 1 0 J14 1 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock RS485 to Rear Panel RS485 to Rear Panel 5V 5V 5V Oo aoa N O 0 A W N i S O EXT RS485 J15 gt Ground Ground Ground NC NC oOo aoa N oon A W N gt o 6 10 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fi
2. ocooocononcccnonnninnnnonnnos 3 68 VACUUM paste vor a ia ebotaes 3 68 Min and Max Vacuum Limits sett ss brn cievnstieaiciec nce 3 68 A A ar OR moO TNO EIN 3 69 Min and Max Flow Limits anidan 3 69 PTO A Lat a la 3 69 LOWY cat E E A E E R A EE A AT 3 70 Min and Max Flow Limits nadan tia 3 70 Concentration ass da 3 70 Ayerage Pri a 3 71 Min and Max Average PM Concentration Limits 0 0 eee 3 71 AAA Rise ais eA 3 71 Min and Max Instant PM Concentration Limits c0ccc00 3 72 Service MERU fs ese chev e a dia 3 72 RH Temperature Calibrations ette lei 3 73 Ambient em peracetic io ii i e iaat 3 73 Flow Temperatute la aia 3 74 Ambient Relativo Hindi 3 74 Pressure Vacuum Calibration a noma ticnisian 3 74 Barometer Pressure Calibration c ccccssccsssssesssssesssseeesssseeseees 3 75 Calibrate Barometer Pressure Pta iaa 3 75 Restore Default Calibration seescseseeeseeesseeseresesersseessresrreesreessee 3 76 Vacuum Flow Calibration eeesseessseeeseeeseesserssressreseressreesserssress 3 76 Calibrate Vacuum Flow Zerain 3 76 Calibrate Vacuum Pressure Pida 3 77 Calibrate Flow Pressure Parar od 3 77 Restore Default Calibracion a 3 78 Flow al PAC O Bich sues tees ts ne Ss 3 78 Auto Flow Cabra acaba iaotten Coutts mere tesit bhdorakes 3 79 Manual Flow Calibracion 3 79 Mass Calibration eierniie aniria aaia aa 3 79 Thermal Mass Cocfaci ntusi adi 3 80 Vacuum Mass Costhcientasian aia dr as 3 80 Barometer Mass COC A Gdacsscia
3. DH mii MIA di Lafin rri The auto zero procedure of mass will begin and last approximately 270 seconds When the zero is complete the beta attenuation measurement will remain closed and an average Beta count rate is displayed 5 Remove the zero null foil and insert with the Span foil e g 1328 ug and press to begin the span calibration or press _M_ to stop the foil 4 10 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Procedure The span foil calibration procedure is now active and after another 270 seconds the calibration procedure should end whereby a new Mass Coef value is shown and the percent difference is shown from the last foil calibration to the current calibration This percent difference can also be used to directly audit the mass coefficient value since a percent difference in a mass coefficient is the same percent mass difference overall 6 After the span calibration the screen will ask you to press to accept the new calibration Otherwise press W_ to keep the old Mass Coef value Remove the span foil and press 4 The bench will now open Remove the filter holder replace the filter tape and press to confirm the calibration routine has now been competed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 4 11 Calibration Calibration Procedure Detector Calibration The Detector Calibration submenu is used to view and set the detecto
4. Power up Screen elf Tes Screen Run Screens Main Menu Range 24Hr Average Calibration Factors Instrument Controls Diagnostics Conc Units PM PM Bkg Set Flow Pump Program Versions PM Range Start Time PM Coef Set Heater Voltages Set Custom Ranges Control Motherboard Off Interface Board RH 1 O Board Temp Detector Board RH Threshold RH Temperature Temp Threshold Ambient RH Filter Tape Control Sample RH Manual Ambient Temp Bench Flow Temp Tape Board Temp Mass Limit Pressure Vacuum Next Time Barometric Start Date Time Vacuum Period Flow Counter Flow Volumetric Conditions Detector Status Temperature Mass Pressure Alpha Datalogging Settings Beta Select SREC LREC Beta Corr View logged data Beta Zero Erase log CRn Thermo Fisher Scientific Select Content Commit Content Reset to Default content Configure Datalogging Communication Settings Serial Settings Instrument ID Geysitech Serial No Communication Protocol Streaming data Config TCP IP Settings VO Config Output Relay Settings 1 10 Digital Input Settings 1 16 Analog Output Config Alllow Over Under All Voltage Channels All Current Channels Voltage Channel 1 6 Current Channel 1 6 Analog Input Config 1 8 Screen Contrast Service Mode on off Date Time Timezone Analog Input Readings IN 1 8 Analog Input Voltages Analog In 1 8 Digital Inputs Input 1 16 Relay States Output 1 10 Test Analog Outputs ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 Current Channe
5. Thermo Fisher Scientific ST Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt The Block Checksum Characters are calculated beginning with a seed value of 00000000 binary 0x00 and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string or response including the framing characters lt STX gt and lt ETX gt The checksum works as an error check The command terminator determines the presence or absence of lt BCC gt If a command is terminated by lt ETX gt then the next two characters are the checksum if the command is terminated with lt CR gt no checksum is attached The block checksum is represented by two characters which represent a 2 digit hex number 1byte e g 1 byte OxAB hex checksum will be represented by the two characters A amp B The checksum is referred to as lt BCC gt throughout this document The following commands are supported by the Gesytec protocol e Instrument Control Command ST e Data Sampling Data Query Command DA There is one control command supported by the Gesytec protocol This lt control commands is a single letter which triggers an action in the instrument These commands are active only when service mode is inactive and the zero span option is present Command N initiates a filter change The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt ET
6. WH nyirni Flow Alarms The Flow Alarms submenu allows the user to view and set the flow alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Alarms Menu Flow The Flow screen displays the current flow and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 16 00 to 17 34 LPM If the flow reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow Alarms gt Flow Min and Max Flow Limits The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum flow alarm limit The minimum and maximum flow screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow Alarms gt Flow gt Min or Max rip gies ML MA Concentration Alarms The Concentration Alarms submenu allows the user to view and set the 24 hour average PM and instant PM concentration alarm parameters e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms 3 70 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Wi mid Average PM The Average PM screen displays the current average PM concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 10000 ug m or 0 to 10 mg m If the av
7. on page 5 2 e Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 5 e Pump Rebuilding on page 5 6 e Leak Test on page 5 6 e Filter Tape Replacement on page 5 7 e Greasing the Cam on page 5 8 Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts and the associated Parts replacement procedures T WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Cleaning the Outside Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the Case labels on the case A Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Cleaning the Inlets The inlet assemblies can include a TSP inlet a U S EPA compatible PMio inlet or a Digital PMio or PM2 inlet Cleaning schedules
8. PM size selective inlet 1 m3 h for 5014 Beta Same construction as the EN reference inlet but with 1 m3 h With special surface protection using an aluminium EMATAL surface With special water separator and easy exchangeable impactor baffle plate Standard tube connection d 16 mm for connecting a continuous monitor Easy converting to PM using the PM25 nozzle plate 8 nozzles Easy converting to PM using the PM nozzle plate 8 nozzles Cyclone Ifa Sharp Cut Cyclone SCC or a BGI Very Sharp Cut Cyclone is being Maintenance used for PM2s sampling Figure 5 3 once every 2 3 weeks the dust pot should be unscrewed emptied and cleaned with a lint free cloth Once every three months the entire SCC assembly should be inspected and cleaned O rings checked for distortion cracks fraying or other problems Replace O rings as necessary 5 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Heater and Sample Tube Weather Proofing Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning Figure 5 3 PM25 Sharp Cut Cyclone On at least an annual basis more frequently in heavily polluted environments the sample tube that attaches to the inlet and to the Model 5014 Beta should be removed and cleaned The use of a bottle brush and string will allow you to remove any deposits within the sample tube This same procedure also applies to the h
9. This command sets the reference beta threshold for the detector to value where value is a floating point representation of the beta threshold The following example sets the beta threshold to 500 Send set beta th 500 Receive set beta th 500 ok Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 29 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 30 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual bkg pm This command reports the current PM backgrounds The following example reports that the PM background is 4 g m Send bkg pm Receive bkg pm 4 000E 00 pg m3 set bkg pm value This command is used to set PM backgrounds to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the background in current selected units The following example sets the PM background to 5 2 ug m Send set bkg pm 5 2 Receive set bkg pm 5 2 ok set cal baro pres span This command automatically calculates the span coefficient based on the entered target pressure value The following example sets the calibration pressure to 720 5 mmHg Send set cal baro offset 720 5 Receive set cal baro offset 720 5 ok set cal flow pres span This command automatically sets the flow pressure span based on the flow pressure entered at the time of calibration The following example successfully sets the new value for flow span based on the flow pressure to 50 5 mmHg Send set cal flow pres span 50 5 Receive set cal flow pres span 50 5 ok set cal flow span Thi
10. 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds The following example sets the number value to 10 seconds Send set stream per 10 Receive set stream per 10 ok stream time This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not according to Table B 4 The following example reports that the streaming data shall not include a time stamp Send stream time Receive stream time O set stream time value This command enables value where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string according to Table B 4 The following example attaches a time stamp to streaming data Send set stream time 1 Receive set stream time 1 ok Table B 4 Stream Time Values Value Stream Time 0 Disables time stamp to streaming data string 1 Attaches time stamp to streaming data string alpha eff This command reports the current value of alpha efficiency for the detector The following example reports that the alpha efficiency is 0 12 Send alpha eff Receive alpha eff 0 120 set alpha eff value This command sets the alpha efficiency for the detector to value where value is a floating point number representing the alpha efficiency for the detector The following example sets the alpha efficiency to 0 15 Send set alpha eff 0 15 Receive set alpha eff 0 150 ok Model 50147 Bet
11. 6 Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt le 1 0 Expansion Board Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 7 12 Rear Panel Board Connectors Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 25 Servicing Digital Output Board Replacement Digital Output Board Replacement A Motherboard Replacement 7 26 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 1D Equipment Required Digital output board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 12 Pop the digital output board off of the mounting studs and remove the board To install the digital output board follow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Fig
12. AP valve open Verify plumbing connections Verify cable connection Replace pressure board Verify valve is in close position Flow Alarms Flow Low flow No flow Check that pump is connected Verify that both AP valves are in the closed position Verify proportional valve plumbing Verify connection to measurement interface board Conc Alarms PM Conc negative Conc alarm setting Check heater and Beta counts Verify conc alarm settings Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Board Level Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 are board level connection diagrams for the Connection mo electronics and measurement system These illustrations can be used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table D lagrams 6 7 to troubleshoot board level faults VOEXPANSION BOARD EPANSICNIO J1 MEASUREMENT DIGITAL OUTPUT TO SYSTEM BOARD DICTA 2 11 Pin 8 Pin 14 PLA a mor 4m L PSAP Sen ii DISPLAY ESAS Pr 8 PANEL 9Pn gt 34 Pn 3Fin BOARD B 1OBASET 142 Sm L_ KEYPANEL EXPANSION RS485 J15 a MOTHER BOARD Hoy SPAREDATA ANALOGOUIPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS 37 pn J PATA gt 3Fin 3Fin id 2An pe PONER GOOD E E dia pr PB Re 3Pn 3Pn 3Pin 24VDC REARPANEL AC PONER 24VDC ANUT 30m SUPPLY dl AC FRONT PANEL PONERSW P
13. Analog Voltage Input 8 Ground NC Current Output Return Ground Current Output 1 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 19 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 16 Current Output Return 17 Current Output 2 18 Current Output Return 19 Current Output 3 20 Current Output Return 21 Current Output 4 22 Current Output Return 23 Current Output 5 24 Current Output Return 25 Current Output 6 MOTHER BD J2 1 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Motherboard 8 RS485 to Motherboard Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Label Designator MOTHER BD J1 Pin o o N O o A Wo N gt 3 o Signal Description 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock 6 20 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator DIGITAL J2 1 Relay 1 Contact a OUTPUTS 2 Relay 2 Contact a 3 Relay 3 Contact a 4 Relay 4 Contact a 5 Relay 5 Contact a 6 Relay 6 Contact a 7 Relay 7 Contact a 8 Relay 8 Contact a 9 Relay 9 Contact a 10 Relay 10 Contact a 11 NC 12 Solenoid Drive Output 1 13 Solenoid Drive Output 2 14 Solenoid Drive Output 3 15 Solenoid Drive Output 4 16 Solenoid Drive Output
14. This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety hazards and risks of equipment damage Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Description DANGER A hazard is present that could result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A Alert WARNING A hazard or unsafe practice could result in serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A CAUTION A hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A f Equipment Damage A hazard or unsafe practice could result in property damage if the warning is ignored A Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts in this Manual Alert Description WARNING The Model 5014 is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alert f CAUTION f Equipment Damage About This Manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Description If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired 4 The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service personnel only A The detector assembly should be replaced by a qualified technician knowledgeable in dealing with radiation precautions By removing the detector assembly
15. This valve opening varies according to the flow rate measured across a precision orifice A complete particulate measuring assembly consists of the following main parts e Central Monitoring Unit 50147 Continuous Particulate Monitor e Ambient Inlet Sampling System TSP PMio PM2 5 e Dynamic Heater e Diaphragm Vacuum Pump e External Ambient T RH Sensor Assembly e Internal Data Recording Unit and External Communication Ports e Optional 6 Ft Insulated Extension Tube s e Optional Tripod Support The Model 50147 combines proven technology easy to use menu driven firmware and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability The Model 50142 has the following features e 320 x 240 pixels graphics display e Menu driven firmware e Field programmable ranges e Multiple user defined analog outputs e Analog input options e Linearity through all ranges e User selectable digital input output capabilities e Standard communications features include RS 232 485 and Ethernet Thermo Fisher Scientific Principle of Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Introduction Principle of Operation e C Link MODBUS Gesytec Bayern Hessen ESM Protocol streaming data and NTP Network Time Protocol protocols Simultaneous connections from different locations over Ethernet e Radon gas activity measurement Rn 222 noble gas and mass refinement e Flexible data storage configurations e Volumetric air flow ra
16. Z FIA 37 pm SPARE PHOTO INTERUPTOR Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Pin The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table 6 7 can be Descriptions used along with the board level connection diagrams to troubleshoot board level faults Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 8 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 13 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram on page 6 17 I O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 19 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 20 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label INTFDATA Reference Designator J1 Pin w N Signal Description Ground RS485 to Interface Board RS485 to Interface Board 10 BASE T J2 co N Oo A 0 N Ethernet Output Ethernet Output Ethernet Input NC NC Ethernet Input NC NC EXPANSION BD J3 o N oon A Ww N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Expansion Board RS485 to Expansion Board INTERFACE 24V J4 meN 24V Ground 6 8 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions
17. and according to the Thermo Scientific 50147 Continuous Ambient Particulate Monitor operating manual Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual WEEE Symbol which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense A WEEE Symbol The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol Description Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to waste electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002 96 EC En WEEE and the equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 A Where to Get Help Service is available from exclusive distributors wo
18. displayed Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other measurement values read the status of the digital outputs of the analyzer and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS parameters listed below Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 5014 MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page C 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2 e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C 8 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of
19. registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual C 5 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 6 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Request Function Code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function Code Byte Count Register Value N Quantity of Registers Error Response Function Code Exception Code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte N x 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2xN N N or N 1 Function code 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Re
20. set alarm beta count max 20000 ok alarm board temp min alarm board temp max These commands report the current board temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the board temperature alarm minimum value is 0 C Send alarm board temp min Receive alarm board temp min 0 0 degC set alarm board temp min value set alarm board temp max value These commands set the board temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing board temperature alarm limits in C The following example sets the board temperature alarm maximum value to 38 C Send set alarm board temp max 38 0 Receive set alarm board temp max 38 0 ok alarm conc avg pm min alarm conc avg pm max These commands report the current 24 hour average PM concentration alarm minimum and maximum values setting The following example reports that the average PM concentration minimum is 100 mg m Send alarm conc avg pm min Receive alarm conc avg pm min 1 000E 02 mg m3 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 13 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 14 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual set alarm conc avg pm min value set alarm conc avg pm max value These commands set the 24 hour average PM concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currentl
21. set default params ok det This command reports the status of the detector board sharp beta map none The following example reports that the detector is beta Send det Receive det beta pump This command reports the current status of pump as on or off The following example reports that the pump is set to off Thermo Fisher Scientific Communications Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Send pump Receive pump off set pump onoff onoff on off This command sets the pump on or off The following example sets the pump to on Send set pump on Receive set pump on ok save set save params These commands store all current parameters in FLASH memory It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure The following example saves the parameters to FLASH memory Send set save params Receive set save params ok time This command reports the current time 24 hour format The following example reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm Send time Receive time 14 15 30 set time hh mm ss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the internal clock 24 hour format The following example sets the internal time to 2 15 pm Note If seconds are omitted the seconds default to 00 A Send set time 14 15 Rec
22. the current address A Send set dhcp on Receive set dhcp on ok format This command reports the current reply termination format The following example shows that the reply format is 00 which means reply with no checksum according to Table B 8 Send format Receive format 00 set format format This command sets the reply termination format where format is set according to Table B 8 The following example sets the reply termination format to checksum Send set format 01 Receive set format 01 ok Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 47 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 48 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Table B 8 Reply Termination Formats Format Reply Termination 00 lt CR gt 01 lt NL gt sum xxxx lt CR gt where xxxx 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters bytes in the message host name This command reports the host name string The following example reports the host name is set to Series Send host name Receive host name iSeries set host name string This command sets the host name string where string is 1 13 alphanumeric characters The following example sets the host name to analyzer01 Send set host name analyzero1 Receive set host name analyzer01 ok instr name This command reports the instrument name The following example reports the instrument name for the Model 50144 Send instr name Receive instr name Beta Particle
23. thermal mass coef Receive thermal mass coef 19 0000 set thermal mass coef value This command sets the thermal mass coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the thermal mass coefficient to 20 5 Send set thermal mass coef 20 5 Receive set thermal mass coef 20 5 ok vac mass coef This command reports the current vacuum mass coefficient The following example reports that the vacuum mass coefficient is 2 0 Send vac mass coef Receive vac mass coef 2 0 set vac mass coef value This command sets the vacuum mass coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the vacuum mass coefficient to 3 1 Send set vac mass coef 3 1 Receive set vac mass coef 3 1 ok vac pres span This command reports the vacuum span for the detector at the time of calibration The following example reports that the vacuum pressure span is 1 0 Send vac pres span Receive vac pres span 1 000 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 33 C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display Keys Display B 34 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual set vac pres span This command sets the vacuum span to the value specified at the time of calibration The following example successfully sets the new value for vacuum pressure span to 1 002 Send set vac pres zero 1 002 Receive set
24. use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set screen constrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See the C Link Protocol Commands appendix for more information on this command A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Service Locations Service Locations For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 41 Thermo Fisher Scientific Hardware Chapter 8 System Description This chapter describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections and functions as follows e Hardware on page 8 1 e Firmware on page 8 4 e Electronics on page 8 5 e I O Components on page 8 7 Model 50147 hardware Figure 8 1 includes Primary measurement head Detector amplifier Cam photo interrupt board assembly Counter wheel interrupt board assembly Proportional valve Cam motor Tape motor Pressure board Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 8 1 System Description Hardware Primary Measurement Head Assy Detector Amp Tape Radius Guide Tape Guide Wheel Assy Filter
25. 0 degC set flow temp offset value This command sets the offset value for flow temperature where value is a floating point number representing flow temperature offset in degrees C The following example sets the flow temperature offset to 7 C Send set flow temp offset 7 Receive set flow temp offset 7 ok high volt This command reports the current high voltage for the detector The following example reports that the high voltage is 1400 V Send high volt Receive high volt 1400 set high volt value This command sets the high voltage for the detector to value where value is a floating point representation of the high voltage The following example sets the high voltage to 1445 V Send set high volt 1445 Receive set high volt 1445 ok mass coef This command reports the current mass coefficient The following example reports that the mass coefficient is 7100 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration Send mass coef Receive mass coef 7100 set mass coef value This command sets the mass coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the mass coefficient to 7000 Send set mass coef 7000 Receive set mass coef 7000 ok thermal mass coef This command reports the current thermal mass coefficient The following example reports that the thermal mass coefficient is 19 0000 Send
26. 2 11 25 Pin Terminal Board Views Detail A Table 2 5 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Out 13 Analog_In1 2 Isolated ground 14 Analog_In2 3 lOut2 15 Analog_In3 4 Isolated ground 16 Ground 5 lOut3 17 Analog_In4 6 Isolated ground 18 Analog_In5 7 lOut4 19 Analog_In6 8 Isolated ground 20 Ground 9 lOut5 21 Analog_In7 10 Isolated ground 22 Analog_In8 11 10ut6 23 Ground 12 Isolated ground 24 Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Detail B Power Connections Thermo Fisher Scientific A Startup Installation Startup Before the power is connected be sure that the front panel power switch is OFF and be sure to verify that the local power matches the label on the back of the analyzer WARNING The Model 5014 is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A Use the following procedure when starting the instrument 1 Turn the power ON and allow 12 hours for the beta detector to stabilize 2 Although the instrument has been calibrated at the factory if the instrument has been equilibrated temperature sensors may be checked Assure that the heater is off and that the instrument is sampling room air at a constant temperature for at least 1 2 hours with the cover removed 3 After a 12 hour stabilization the following steps should be performe
27. 35 C Send set temp th 35 Receive set temp th 35 ok contrast This command reports the screen s level of contrast The following example shows the screen contrast is 55 according to Table B 6 Send contrast Receive contrast 11 55 set contrast evel This command sets the screen s level of contrast according to Table B 6 The following example sets the contrast level to 50 Send set contrast 10 Receive set contrast 10 ok Table B 6 Contrast Levels Level Contrast Level 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 10 50 55 60 65 70 75 m Oo Jol mwasl as A A JN gt gt gt gt gt a gt w N Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual B 41 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 42 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Level Contrast Level 16 80 17 85 18 90 19 95 20 100 date This command reports the current date The following example reports the date as April 1 2009 Send date Receive date 04 01 09 set date mm dd yy mm month dd day yy year This command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The following example sets the date to May 1 2009 Send set date 05 01 09 Receive set date 05 01 09 ok set default params This command sets all the parameters to their default values This does not affect the factory calibrated parameters Send set default params Receive
28. 4 E Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure If the Service menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 2 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode The Service Mode screen appears 3 Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON 4 Press M gt to return to the Main Menu 5 Return to the procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Replacement Parts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Replacement Parts List Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 50147 major List subassemblies Refer to Figure 7 2 to identify the component location Table 7 1 Model 50147 Replacement Parts Part Number Description 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board 110570 00 Processor Board new Port and cramfs required 100533 00 Motherboard 100539 00 Digital Output Board 100542 00 1 0 Expansion Board optional 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board 102496 00 Front Panel Display 106926 00 Transformer Step Down 220 240 VAC optional 104290 00 Measurement Interface Board 105869 00 Detector Assembly LND4335 105938 00 Photo Interrupt Board Ass
29. 5 17 Solenoid Drive Output 6 18 Solenoid Drive Output 7 19 Solenoid Drive Output 8 20 Relay 1 Contact b 21 Relay 2 Contact b 22 Relay 3 Contact b 23 Relay 4 Contact b 24 Relay 5 Contact b 25 Relay 6 Contact b 26 Relay 7 Contact b 27 Relay 8 Contact b 28 Relay 9 Contact b 29 Relay 10 Contact b 30 24V 31 24V 32 24V 33 24V Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 21 Troubleshooting Service Locations Connector Reference Pin Label Designator 34 35 36 37 Signal Description 24V 24V 24V 24V Service For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors Locations 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International 6 22 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 50147 subassemblies It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced or is an expendable item not covered under warranty Expendable items are indicated with an asterisk in the Model 5014i Replacement Parts table For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual The service mode section in the Operation chapter also inclu
30. 7 Allow Mode Command Values oocococicoiciiciciociocincinoonicoinonoonos B 46 Table B 8 Reply Termination FOrMatS oococociciconoccinnncocononcnnncnrnnnonocoronnnoos B 48 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual xix Tables xx Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Table B 9 Set Layout Ack ValU S c ccccccscesessesccseseesecesseceeseseetecestecesesee B 49 Table B 10 Power Up Mode Values ooooococicinoconoinonoonincnononocnrnnonocoronoooos B 50 Table B 11 Analog Current Output Range Values 0 0 cece cece ceeeeeeeeees B 51 Table B 12 Analog Voltage Output Range Values oooonoininoinicciinncccnno B 52 Table B 13 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments B 53 Table C 1 Read Coils for DO14T oooocoocicincicconiccconoconinccnroconrnncnrononrnocoroccnroncnnnos C 8 Table C 2 Read Registers for DO VA occocicoccicconicconincononconnccnrnccnrnncnroncnrnrcnnos C 9 Table G 3 Write Coils Tar naa C 11 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 50147 ccceceteeteteeeeeeee D 7 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 50143 oo cece ceteseetestetesteteeeeeeee D 8 Table E 1 Read Commands for 50M icono cantidad nda cles E 1 Table E 2 Write Commands for 50147 oooococoociciciccocioconinccnonccnrnccnnccnrnccnrnrcnnnos E 2 Table E 3 Control Commands for 5014 T oocociconcicconiccccnocininccnrncononocnrnncnrnncnnos E 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Introduction The Model 50147
31. 8 Figure 9 6 Securing the Roof Flange 9 9 Figure 10 1 SHARP Optics Connection Bracket o ooociocoioinoncininninicninnoos 10 2 Figure 10 2 Tape Pick up Spool Removal onoociconoioconinccninccnincnrnconinonosos 10 3 Figure 10 3 Filter Tape Installation Pathway ooococicicicicicninininocncncnnnocooos 10 4 Figure 10 4 Connecting Connection Bracket Wiring to Measurement Interface A A ear er ee een 10 5 Figure 10 5 Radius Tube Adapter Install oo ccc cececeseetetesesesteteseseees 10 6 Figure 106 Radius Tube Adapter Alignment Check ocoocicoo icio o 10 6 Figure 10 7 Rear Valve Assembly Installati0N oooiococnoinino o 10 7 Figure 10 8 Plumbing Diagram ooooonoococicicicocnnocnononccncnrnnnonocornnnonorornnnnnoroso 10 8 Figure 10 9 Optics Installation it 10 9 Figure 10 10 Connecting the Optics to the Optics Connector 10 9 Figure 10 11 Upgrading 50307 Heater Assembly o o o oooo o o 10 10 Figure 10 12 Connecting Heater to Optics Assembly Cover 10 11 Figure 10 13 Front Panel Label Replacement 0 ccc ceceteeeteteteseees 10 11 Figure B 14 Flags Held ocu tas B 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Model 50147 Specifications ooocoocicicnicinninoncnnincnninnncnenncnonncnnnnos 1 7 Table 2 1 Pressure Units COnVErSiON cccccccss
32. 8 7 Analog Voltage Out pitts iota st paa 8 7 Analog Current Outputs Optional ooononnonnnnonicnnnnononnnnnnnoncnnnnnoncnos 8 8 Analog Voltage Inputs Opuntia 8 8 Digital Relay Outputs IU Gani 8 8 Dil e SS oO 8 9 Serial Doris tia 8 9 RS 232 Connections ia 8 10 RS 48 5 Connection be erneiert Rages 8 10 Ethernet Co nections urea iiig is 8 11 External Accessory Com rcio 8 11 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Optional Equipment cssssssssssssssessessessssssssessessesssesseeeaesasestessesesaeeateatees 9 1 A OS 9 1 Sampling Tube Extensions o ado os 9 1 I O Expansion Board Assembly ici its 9 1 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly iii dana dd n 9 1 Terminal Block and Cable ica 9 2 Cables IS 9 2 Mounting Options siasii iian A 9 3 Roof Flange Assembly iia lord sind 9 8 Model 5014 to 5030 Upgrade Procedures ocococononmmmma 10 1 Instrument Preparatorias 10 1 Radius Tube Adapter Instalada 10 5 SHARP Extemal Valve Installation mita de 10 7 SHARP Optics Assembly Installation ononnnniconnnmmmmmmmmmm ms 10 9 Upgrade of the Heater Tube Assembly isco con ieee cede 10 10 Model Label Chanta ich iin ria atl ite at 10 11 Power O Instrument q A ta 10 11 Wat a a e e a A 1 C Link Protocol COMMANGG csssessssesssseeseesseessesssseessseessseessneeseseesens B 1 Instrument Identification Numbers ice B 1 Command dis B 2 Commands tdo illes B 3 MESSI ENS a A B 9 AS A da B 11 o A
33. Bayern Hessen Protocol sccscssssessessessesseeseeseeneseeneeneenees D 1 Serial Communication Parameters cs cccsssscssssseesssceesssseeseseeeees D 1 TCP Communication Parameters coccoononononannnononnonanannnnnnnnccnonannnnn nooo D 2 Instruir e a Ata D 2 Abbreviations Used ara a da D 2 Basic Command Sec cine A ES D 2 Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt ccccccssssscesssecesssecssseecssseeesssees D 3 Gesytec Commands a ida D 3 Instrument Control Command STD ooonoccconnnonononinonnnacinananacinananac ns D 3 Data Sampling Data Query Command DA eccoonicninnnniononnnnnnnannncnnos D 4 Measurements reported in response to DA command eee D 7 Operating and Error Status cta Na D 7 ESM Protocol COMMAnNdS sssssssssssscsessssesssssssssessssesssacsesscsesacseeaceeeaees E 1 ESM Commands Supported cia its E 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 Model 50147 Flow Schematic oooooncociccccconoconinccnnnccnoncnrnccnrnononos 1 4 Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material ooooicococoiciciocininoncncncnnorooonoooso 2 3 Figure 2 2 Model 5014 Sampling Room Air Under Stable Conditions 2 6 Figure 2 3 Model 50147 Side View inches millimeters 2 9 Figure 2 4 Model 50147 Top View inches millimeters 2 10 Figure 2 5 Model 50147 Vertical View ooonoococonicicicininononnnnin
34. Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 Instrument Configuration The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the hardware configuration of the instrument Note If the analyzer is in service mode pressing will toggle the selected item between yes and no A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration Wi mph Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Alarms Menu Contact Information The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Contact Information ip priori Piet Alarms Menu The alarms menu allows the user to view a set of alarms for different boards and displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed Items displayed are determined by the options installed To see the actual read
35. EPA PMio Inlet Once a month the sampler inlet should be dismantled and cleaned Mark each assembly point of the sampler inlet with a pen or pencil to provide reference marks during reassembly Disassemble the sample inlet unit according to Figure 5 1 If the assembly screws are frozen apply penetrating oil or commercial lubricant to make removal easier Clean all interior surfaces and the bug screen with a general purpose cleaner or compressed air paying particular attention to small openings and cracks Cotton swabs and or a small brush are helpful Completely dry all components Also monthly check the O rings for distortion cracks fraying or other problems and replace as necessary Apply small amounts of grease to the rings before assembling the unit Reassemble the unit in accordance with the previously scribed match marks Particular care should be taken to ensure that all O rings seals are properly seated and that all screws are uniformly tightened The same schedule should be used for the European PM Inlet e g Leckel at approximately a 1 2 month interval The components of the inlet should be inspected and cleaned as necessary Figure 5 2 provided below provides an image and design drawing of the inlet with references to parts Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the Inlets Nozzle 8 Baffle Plate Safety Snap Locks Tube d 16 14 Figure 5 2 European PM Inlet
36. External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog input voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs Each may be firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 8 7 System Description 1 0 Components Analog Current Outputs Optional Analog Voltage Inputs Optional Digital Relay Outputs 8 8 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual e 0 100 mV eo 0 1V o 0 5V e 0 10V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs The optional 1 O expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits e 0 20 mA e 4 20mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 5
37. Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater gt Temp Threshold ty prek prnpr Lira EN EEE TE haa nr Filter Tape Control The Filter Tape Control menu allows the user to manually move or set the next time period for tape control e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Instrument Controls Menu EH Guided ML MA Manual The Manual screen allows the user to move or stop the filter tape and open or close the measurement bench e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Manual DH Guided Piet Mass Limit The Mass Limit screen allows the user to set the mass limit The default is 1 500 pg or 1 5 mg and is specified as part of any U S EPA and TUV approvals However the limit can be increased as much as 5 000 pg for non regulatory monitoring e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Mass Limit Next Time The Next Time screen is used to view and set the initial date and time 24 hour format for the next filter tape change e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Next Time 3 18 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Ci Ciro H Period The Period screen allows the user to set the period The next filter tap
38. NOT USED 37 amp 38 BETA 39 amp 40 ANALOG IN 1 41 amp 42 ANALOG IN 2 43 amp 44 ANALOG IN 3 45 amp 46 ANALOG IN 4 47 amp 48 ANALOG IN 5 49 amp 50 ANALOG IN 6 51 amp 52 ANALOG IN 7 53 amp 54 ANALOG IN 8 55 amp 56 BETA RAW 57 amp 58 ALPHA RAW 59 amp 60 AVG PM 61 amp 62 NOT USED 63 amp 64 MASS 65 amp 66 NOT USED 67 amp 68 BETA ZERO 69 amp 70 NOT USED 71 amp 72 NEPH 713874 NOT USED 75 amp 76 NOT USED 77 amp 78 NOT USED 79 amp 80 NOT USED 81 amp 82 NOT USED 83 amp 84 SHARP 85 amp 86 NOT USED 87 amp 88 AVG SHARP Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Register Number Variable 89 amp 90 NOT USED 91 amp 92 EXT ALARMS 93 amp 94 NEPH TEMP 95 amp 96 NEPH RH 97 amp 98 NEPH IRED 99 amp 100 NEPH REF 101 amp 102 BETA REF 103 amp 104 NOT USED 105 amp 106 COMMON FLAGS 107 amp 108 BETA DETECTOR FLAGS 109 amp 110 NOT USED 111 amp 112 COMP MASS 113 amp 114 NOT USED 115 amp 116 AVG NEPH IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Writing 1 to the coil number shown in the following table will initiate the action triggered listed in the table This state must be held for
39. ON B 17 Data on ia B 20 Calibraci n B 27 A O A e aes kone eee B 34 Measurement Configuration adan dls B 35 Hardware Con honra ed a dl sa a B 41 Communications Configuration strict dias B 43 VO Configutatcioniaci n dia a cial B 50 Record Layout DEIA AAA eentivianaets B 55 Format Specifier for ASCH Responses a B 56 Format Specifier for Binary Responses etica si B 56 Format Specifier for Erec Lavoe iretasds lt sadeteeandsheed sce teaedas cess B 57 Vta tds B 57 Valid E Ss B 57 Value Source iii B 57 Alarm Informati n a Da B 58 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual xv Contents xvi Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Translation Tablada ala ais B 58 Selection Tables sn iia B 58 DUE Res MACs ieor on iiaa eaves B 58 Biman ples iii ens E KEE RE a B 59 MODBUS Protocolo ici C 1 Serial Communication Parameters tii cia ii C 1 TCP Communication Parameters occonnonononannnononnonannnonononocnonannnnn nooo C 2 Application Data Unit Definition csc ias C 2 AS EDIRNE 4 ho ROTC A Re C 2 MBAP Header tai aid C 2 F nci n older tn ten Rene Pe RM on ener nae IE rer Ena ROME en Seer tan C 3 Dita E didas C 3 Error Checa SAS C 3 F nction Codes do C 3 0x01 0x02 Read Colls Read Inputs sra C 3 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 0x05 Force Write Single Gail La C 7 MODBUS Parameters Supported ccciscceccsscisucccevenaceep atecsteeisdeatdanatecss C 8 Gesytec
40. Power Supply eel Interface Interrupt Coupler Assy vlemnenopate Optional Transformer Figure 7 2 Model 50147 Component Layout 7 8 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel REMOVE SCREWS Pass Through Connectors Loosen Captive Partition Panel Remove Screw 4 A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel The measurement case assembly can be removed and the partition panel can be lowered to improve access to connectors and components Refer to the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel Figure 7 3 Remove Screw Remove Screws Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment Required Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing Fuse Replacement 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Ifthe instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack 3 Remove the cover 4 Disconnect the plumbing connections at the rear of the measurement case assembly 5 Disconnect the connectors that pass through the center of the part
41. Pressure Vacuum Cabrones 4 4 Barometer Pressure Calibraci n 4 4 Calibrate Vacuum Flow Zetosscteient adie da detiei akin 4 5 Calibrate Vacuum Pressure pa a prada 4 5 Calibrate Flow Pressure Span da ie NR 4 6 E O Ey ne ro E 4 7 Auto Flow Calibration spots 4 7 Mass Calibration iii A 4 7 Mass Coefficient siitin n aisn iins aies 4 9 Auto Mass Coefhcientaiaicaca ic 4 9 Detector Calibrations sisata a inde A NN 4 12 Auto Detector Caibrbo i 4 12 Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance ssssessssessssssesseeseseeseeessesseeseeateneseeaeeneeaneeees 5 1 Safety Preca tion sne nera dae 5 1 Replacement Parts aaeei ai a E E ee neha 5 2 Cleaning the Outside Casera nai e 5 2 xii Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Cleaning the Inlet suspicacia rte 5 2 US EPA PMi Inletin oan E E NOA 5 2 European PM o PM25 Inlet AN dar a A es 5 3 Cyclone Maintenance nasa 5 4 Hester and Sample Iber io uae a 5 5 NO 5 5 Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning AS 5 5 Pump Rebuild et ieira diia 5 6 Weak Testiin innta A A A 5 6 Filter Tape Replacement or in 5 7 GANE the Cia nadaa 5 8 Troubleshooting e 6 1 Safety Precautions ain E E E ERRE 6 1 Troubleshooting Gaiden ici ad 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagrams da iaa da 6 6 Connector Pin Descriptions sevi iris 6 8 Service LOCAS A a aE 6 22 AAA NA A A 1 1 Safety Precautions le e cio 7 3 Firmware Updates inicia cti 7 4 Accessing the Service M
42. Streaming Data e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Communication Protocol Streaming Data Configuration The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration 3 34 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual of the 8 streaming data output items streaming interval current data format and current timestamp setting The Choose Stream Data submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu prek pruni PELIR E perp PPP LES Ea in bab i WH mnie Streaming Data Interval The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust how frequently a new record will be generated The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Interval Wi mri MIA Note Add Labels Prepend Timestamp and Add Flags are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected A Choose Stream Data The Choose Stream Data screen displays a list of the types of data that can be sent via streaming data Choices are Concent
43. Tape Supply Reel Boa ilter Tape Supply Ree Radius Counter Wheel Assy Guide Counter Wheel Photo Interrupt Board Assy ITO AA A Spindle Tape Wheel Assy Tube Mounting Block Assy Cam Final Assy Cam Photo Interrupt Board Pressure Board Proportional Valve w fitting Assy 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Front Panel Digital Output Board Front Panel Board Motor w Photo Motherboard Power Supply Measurement Interface Interrupt Coupler Assy Board Optional Transformer Figure 8 1 Hardware Components 8 2 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Primary Measurement Head Detector Amplifier Cam Photo Interrupt Board Counter Wheel Interrupt Board Assembly Proportional Valve Cam Motor Tape Motor Pressure Board Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Hardware The primary measurement head uses a beta source and proportional alpha beta detector to measure the attenuation of beta particles by sampled aerosol across a glass fiber filter and to discriminate against any naturally occurring beta interferences from the daughter nuclides of alpha decay products This cylindrical tube houses a printed circuit board provides power to the proportional detector and amplifies the beta and alpha counts prior to being sent to the 50147 measurement interface board This small printed circuit board includes a photo interrupter to detect the
44. and wind the tape over itself at least once Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 10 3 Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures Instrument Preparation Figure 10 3 Filter Tape Installation Pathway 6 Complete the installation of the SHARP Optics Connection Bracket by connecting the 4 pin connector to the SHARP 1 connector on the measurement interface board as shown below in Figure 10 4 Note It should not be necessary to remove the electronics from the instrument case to achieve this connection and the spare 2 pin connector is not used A 10 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures Radius Tube Adapter Installation Figure 10 4 Connecting Connection Bracket Wiring to Measurement Interface Board Radius Tube Use the following procedure for radius tube adapter installation Adapter Installation 1 Loosen the Radius Tube Mounting bracket screws 2 Slide back bracket downwards 3 Slowly remove the existing Radius Face Seal by pulling straight up with a twisting action 4 Slowly insert the Radius Tube Adapter onto the Radius Tube and push down with a slight twist until it is seated 5 Tighten the radius tube mounting bracket screws as shown in Figure 10 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 10 5 Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures Radius Tube Adapter Installation Figure 10 5 Radius
45. and connectors to make up the difference between the desired inlet height and the top of the heater Additional routing is necessary for the ambient T RH sensor assembly 2 10 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup PMio or PMz5 Ambient Inlet lt Ambient T RH Sensor Assembly T RH Sensor Cable Foof Flange 5 8 SS Tubing 5 8 Union w Teflon Ferrule RRA 3 Feet Universal __ gt y Heater Figure 2 5 Model 5014 Vertical View Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 11 Installation Setup Sample Tube Extension Lengths Rack Mounting Option Monitor Installation 2 12 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual There is one standard length of heated sample tube at one meter Sample tube extensions are used for added height One limiting factor when siting the Model 50147 is placement within a standard 19 inch rack mounting Future planning should be made to reserve the topmost rack mounting position available due to the vertical positioning of the sample tube directly from the roof into the top of the Model 50142 In addition modification to the rack cabinet to accommodate the vertical tubing connection also needs to be considered prior to installation For more information see Chapter 9 Optional Equipment Review the following installation steps prior to field installation Once all height requireme
46. and routine maintenance of assembly components should be in accordance with a good quality assurance plan In general it is recommended that the inlet assemblies be cleaned on a quarterly interval with mild soap solution a thorough rinsing and dried with a lint free cloth If any impaction surfaces require impactor grease it should be applied prior to reassembly Furthermore a general inspection and replacement as necessary of o rings should be done Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A U S EPA PM Inlet The water collector bottle located on the PMo inlet should be inspected at least every five sampling days Figure 5 1 Remove any accumulated water clean the interior of the bottle inspect the seals and replace the bottle in the holder 5 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific European PMio PM25 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inlet Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the Inlets Top Plate with f NT Deflector Cone Screen 9 Spacer A P fi Lower Plate with crew Rain Deflector Acceleration Assembly Ht Water Collector Collector Assembly Figure 5 1 U S
47. at least 1 second to ensure the instrument detects the change and triggers the appropriate action A Note The coils within each coil group in the following table are mutually exclusive and will not be triggered if there is conflict Before you assert 1 one coil in a group make sure the other coils in the group are de asserted 0 A Table C 3 Write Coils for 5014 Coil Number Action Triggered 100 INVALID 101 NOT USED 102 NOT USED 103 NOT USED 104 AOUTS TO ZERO Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual C 11 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 12 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Coil Number Action Triggered 105 AOUTS TO FS 106 FT COUNT 107 FILTER TAPE CNTRL 108 PUMP CNTRL ON OFF 109 TEMP COMP ON OFF 110 PRES COMP ON OFF 111 HEATER ON OFF 112 HTR RH TEMP CNTRL 113 NOT USED 114 NOT USED 115 EXT ALARM 1 116 EXT ALARM 2 117 EXT ALARM 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix D Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol This appendix provides a description of the Gesytec Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The Gesytec commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The Gesytec protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrati
48. commands Send allow mode cmd Receive allow mode cmd O set allow mode cmd value This command is used to configure the instrument to value where value is either 1 accept or 0 ignore the set mode local and set mode remote commands according to Table B 7 If the instrument is set to accept the commands value 1 the set mode local command will unlock the instrument and the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 45 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 46 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual If the instrument is set to ignore the commands value 0 the instrument will respond with ok as if the command has been accepted and acted upon but will not change the instrument lock status this is for compatibility with systems expecting and ok response Note The instrument will always respond to the command mode with the status of the password lock as mode local or mode remote regardless of the above setting A The following example sets the instrument to accept the set mode local and set mode remote commands Send set allow mode cmd 1 Receive set allow mode cmd 1 ok Table B 7 Allow Mode Command Values Value Allow Mode Command 0 Ignore default 1 Accept baud This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port RS232 RS485 The following example reports that
49. default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital output pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital output action 3 40 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is assigned to the selected relay output A submenu lists signal types of either alarms or non alarm to choose from e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State CH perm Wi hid Pi AS Lf bi Alarms The Alarms screen allows the user to select an alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it The I O board status alarm is only present if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 42 Non Alarm Digital Input Settings Logic State Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual The Non Alarm screen allows the user to select a non alarm status for the selected relay output The c
50. dp Ghent Bs EEE TE aa ERL Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol NTP Server screen is used to edit the IP Server address of the NTP server An NTP server may be used to periodically synchronize the instrument s real time clock with a standard More information about the NTP servers and a list of public servers may be found at http www ntp org e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt NTP Svr Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Instrument Controls Menu I O Configuration The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration EME EE ad Booe Feed F PUREE EE Output Relay Settings The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings E Pira Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The
51. earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults 3 88 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Password Menu The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface but they can still be changed via remote operation When the front panel is locked the user can still navigate the menu and view data instrument parameters and settings but nothing can be changed The password lock icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the password lock is active The items visible under the Password menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Bs EEE TE Bone nr Set Password The Set Password screen is used to set the password that is used to unlock the front panel and is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is not set e In the Main Menu choose Password gt Set Password Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 89 Operation Password Menu Lock Instrument The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users cannot change any settings from the front panel The lock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Lock Instrume
52. equipment that can be used with this analyzer Chapter 10 Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures describes the 5014 to 50301 upgrade procedures Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual i About This Manual Safety Safety Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual e Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix D Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol provides a description of the Gesytec Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix E ESM Protocol Commands provides a description of the ESM Protocol commands from the prior FH62 platform that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer however if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired
53. example reports that the barometric pressure alarm minimum value is 500 0 mmHg Send alarm baro pres min Receive alarm baro pres min 500 0 mmHg set alarm baro pres min value set alarm baro pres max value These commands set the barometric pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing barometric pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The following example sets the barometric pressure alarm maximum value to 800 0 mmHg Send set alarm baro pres max 800 0 Receive set alarm baro pres max 800 0 ok alarm bench status This command reports the current status of the bench as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the bench status is OK Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms Send alarm bench status Receive alarm bench status ok alarm beta count min alarm beta count max These commands report the current beta count alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the beta count alarm minimum value is 5000 Send alarm beta count min Receive alarm beta count min 5000 set alarm beta count min value set alarm beta count max value These commands set the beta count alarm minimum and maximum value where value is an integer number representing beta count limits The following example sets the beta count alarm maximum value to 20000 Send set alarm beta count max 20000 Receive
54. instrument by use of the push connect fittings 12 Connect the vacuum pump power cord to the white circular grounded power supply labeled PUMP on the rear panel of the instrument 13 Connect the 4 pin Temperature RH cable to the 4 pin connector labeled RH TEMP on the rear of the monitor 14 Be sure that the pressure sensor calibration port toggle switches on the rear panel are pushed outward and away from the barbed Delta P 15 Set monitor power switch to the ON position During startup the Series splash screen will be shown followed by a mechanical filter tape change and a cycling of the pump power To continue with the acceptance testing e From the Main Menu select Diagnostics gt RH Temperatures The RH Temperatures screen read only displays the current relative humidity in percent and the temperature readings in C The board temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the measurement interface board e Press M to return to the Diagnostics menu and choose Pressure Vacuum Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures 2 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual The Pressure Vacuum screen read only displays the barometric vacuum and flow pressure readings in mmHg The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer The vacuum is the amount of vacuum under the filter tape The flow pressure is the p
55. is calculated At any given time the output signal delivers the concentration of particulate in actual or standard conditions The Model 50147 outputs particulate matter concentrations to the front panel display the analog outputs and also makes the data available over the serial or Ethernet connection Additionally the Model 5014 proportional detector is sensitive to natural alpha activity of the aerosol passing through the sampling system The additional alpha count rate is used to measure the presence of Radon gas and infer the daughter nuclides of Radon gas These daughter nuclides create a small beta emission This externally sampled beta emission is perceived by the detector to be a higher count rate and the higher the count rate the less apparent mass detected Therefore by measuring the natural alpha activity due to Radon gas the proportional beta interference from the daughter nuclide emissions are subtracted from the count rate to provide a refined mass measurement This potential error from Radon gas interference may be in lower strength radioactive devices e g lt 100 Ci as high as actual particle concentrations especially after filter change or when the natural activity concentration changes The Model 5014 has implemented this procedure to determine separately the natural activity in the aerosol and to eliminate this error This procedure further allows the Model 5014 to provide a more stable reading at lower ambient parti
56. is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Program Versions The Program Versions screen read only shows the version numbers of the programs installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name and the program version numbers e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Program Versions Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Diagnostics Menu E Miker i Voltages The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter The I O board item is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages E Pira Motherboard Voltages The Motherboard screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the motherboard e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Motherboard E Mihei i Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the measurement interface board e In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Interface Board 3 54 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Wi bid Pin Paid 1 0 Board Voltages The I O Board screen read only is
57. ketone based or aromatic solvent to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent amp Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual iii About This Manual Electrical Safety Certifications iv Electrical Safety Certifications TERTE EM CE Listed FEM Statement FCC Compliance Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Alert Description Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A The product has been tested and has been documented to be in compliance with the following U S and Canadian safety standards UL Standard 61010 1 2004 2nd Edition CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 2004 2nd Edition IEC 61326 2 3 2006 Thermo Fisher Scientific certifies that this product operates in compliance with the EC Directive 89 336 EEC in reference to electrical emissions and immunity Specifically the equipment meets the requirements of EN 61326 1 1998 for Immunity and Emissions In addition the hardware has been tested for personal or fire safety hazards in accordance with EN61010 1 2001 Safety in fulfillment of EC Directive 73 23 EEC Thermo Scientific 5014i Beta Continuous Particulate Monitor for PM10 Automated Equivalent Method EQPM 1102 150 Thermo Scientific Model 5014 Beta Continuous Ambient Particle Monitor configured with a 10 micron size selective inlet and a DHS operated with a total actual flow of 16 67 L min
58. meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing 6 Press to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays Full Scale 7 Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 8 Press to reset the analog outputs to normal 1 0 EXPANSION Current Outputs Analog Voltage Inputs Analog Voltage Outputs gt gt E Figure 7 9 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing Analog Output Calibration Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Voltage Pin Current Pin Channel Channel 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output Return 13 16 18 20 22 24 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Input Channel Pin 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 9 8 10 Ground 4 8 11 14 Analog Outp Ut Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter Calibration
59. more information Send tz Receive tz EST 5EDT set tz string This command sets the timezone string for the instrument for use with the NTP server where string is a standard timezone string Common strings are listed in the Timezone screen description in Chapter 3 Send set tz EST 5EDT Receive set tz EST 5EDT ok analog iout range channel This command reports the analog current output range setting for channel where channel must be between 1 and 6 inclusive The following example reports current output channel 4 is in the 4 20 mA range according to Table B 11 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog iout range 4 Receive analog iout range 4 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration set analog iout range channel range This command sets analog current output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 11 The following example sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA range This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send set analog iout range 4 1 Receive set analog iout range 4 1 ok Table B 11 Analog Current Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 20 mA 2 4 20 mA 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined analog vin channel This command retrieves
60. of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel Bami hat abe POE Sek come PE EEE E EUs EEE TE hos Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 87 Operation Service Menu Display Pixel Test The Display Pixel Test screen is used to test the LCD display by toggling between all pixels on and all pixels off to ensure that they are functioning properly The display pixel test screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Display Pixel Test Restore User Defaults The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults Restore Factory The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and Defaults configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode
61. per 5 min set lrec per value set srec per value value 1 5 15 30 60 These commands set the lrecs and srecs logging period to value in minutes The following example sets the lrec logging period to 15 minutes Send set lrec per 15 Receive set lrec per 15 ok malloc lrec malloc srec These commands report the currently set memory allocation for lrecs and srecs in percent of total memory Send malloc lrec Receive malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec value set malloc srec value value 0 to 100 These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for lrecs and sreco to value where value is a floating point number representing percent The following example sets the memory allocation for lrecs to 10 Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logged data in memory All the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands if required A Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 25 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 26 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Send set malloc lrec 10 Receive set malloc lrec 10 ok no of lrec no of srec These commands report the number of Irec and srecs stored memory The following example shows that 50 lrecs have been stored in the memory Send no of lrec Receive no of lrec 50 recs sp field number This command reports the variable number and name stored at the index in the scratch pad list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to
62. set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list The following example shows that field 1 in the scratch pad is set to index number 3 which is for the variable PM concentration pressure Send sp field 1 Receive sp field 1 3 PM set sp field number value number 1 32 for lrec and srec lists 1 8 for streaming data lists This command sets the scratch pad field number item number in scratch pad list to value where value is the index number of a variable in the analog output variable list Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be obtained using the command list var aout The set sp field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the Irec srec or streaming data lists using the set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec or set copy sp to stream commands Send set sp field 1 34 Receive set sp field 1 34 ok stream per This command reports the current time interval in seconds for streaming data The following example reports the streaming period is set to 10 seconds Send stream per Receive stream per 10 sec Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration C Link Protocol Commands Calibration set stream per number value number value 1 2 5 10
63. that the instrument be calibrated once per year and encounter quality checks on a periodic basis in accordance with the users specific quality assurance project plan For example volumetric flow checks on a two week basis are common in some air monitoring agencies and with full scale quarterly audits for flow and mass The Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems published by the U S EPA Research Triangle Park NC 27711 can be consulted for detailed quality assurance guidelines Optional mass transfer standards are available from Thermo Fisher Scientific for performing an annual mass calibration However additional specialized equipment is needed to calibrate the Model 5014 for temperature relative humidity barometric pressure and volumetric flow The following equipment should be used e A thermistor or thermocouple thermometer capable of measuring ambient temperatures in a range of 20 to 50 C readable to the Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 4 1 Calibration Pre Calibration Pre Calibration Calibration Procedure 4 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual nearest 0 1 C This thermometer should be referenced to within an accuracy of 0 5 C to NIST traceable precision thermometers Multiple thermometers may be used to cover the temperature range as long as each thermometer meets the accuracy and readability specifications described above e A barometer capable of measuring barometric press
64. the analog voltage input channel data both the calculated value and the actual voltage In the following example the calculated value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees E volts are 2 796 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog vin 1 Receive analog vin 1 75 325 2 796 V analog vout range channel This command reports the analog voltage output channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive according to Table B 12 The following example reports that analog voltage output channel 2 is set to 3 0 10 V Send analog vout range 2 Receive analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range channel range This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 12 The following example sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range Send set analog vout range 2 3 Receive set analog vout range 2 3 ok Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 51 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 52 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Table B 12 Analog Voltage Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 1V 2 0 100 mV 3 0 10 V 4 0 5 V 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined dig in This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the most significant bit MSB being input 16 Send dig in Receive dig in ox
65. the solder cable connection electrode with your bare fingers The oils from your skin can damage the detector A Safety glasses must be worn while replacing the detector assembly A If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Firmware Updates Accessing the Service Mode 7 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 2 a
66. the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 4 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Thermo Fisher Scientific See Detail A BS See Detail B Installation Connecting External Devices d Assembled Connector Detail A Figure 2 10 D O Terminal Board Views Table 2 4 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Detail B Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Relay1_ContactA 13 Relay7_ContactA 2 Relay1_ContactB 14 Relay7_ContactB 3 Relay2_ContactA 15 Relay8_ContactA 4 Relay2_ContactB 16 Relay8_ContactB 5 Relay3_ContactA 17 Relay9_ContactA 6 Relay3_ContactB 18 Relay9_ContactB 7 Relay4_ContactA 19 Relay10_ContactA 8 Relay4_ContactB 20 Relay10_ContactB 9 Relay5_ContactA 21 not used 10 Relay5_ContactB 22 24V 11 Relay6_ContactA 23 not used 12 Relay6_ContactB 24 24V 25 Pin Terminal Board The 25 pin terminal board is included with the optional I O Expansion Board Figure 2 11 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 19 Installation Connecting External Devices 2 20 See Detail A Assembled Connector Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual down and spacer Table 2 5 identifies the connector pins and associated signals See Detail B Figure
67. until the meter reads the value shown in the set output to field in either V or mA depending on the selected output channel e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale DH pikari ML Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Calibration menu is used to calibrate the 8 analog input channels at both zero and full scale The analog input calibration menu is visible only when the I O expansion board is installed and when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration 3 86 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu ERED CH perm if EN EUH TE Sanat Bone ETET Aad Bast Wi mid PRES CH mT Bet Ebb Eesi MIA i EH ninii BPs EEE TE oa EEY Fad Bast ade P i iNi i Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Zero CRIED A TONO gy mpi PPP L a Pil Bei PERI PLP PRE Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state
68. used to calibrate the vacuum sensor Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Calibration Procedure Calibrate Flow Pressure Span 4 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual RH temp 7 O VACUUM y 2 me eon Oe Figure 4 1 Differential Pressure and Vacuum Calibration Ports A PB e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Vac Pres Span The Flow Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow sensor calibration span point To calibrate the flow pressure sensor span point the instrument must be pulling an active flow through the filter tape By use of a manometer connect the respective ports of your NIST traceable manometer to the respective rear panel ports Please be certain to zero any digital manometers prior to connecting Open the ports by pressing the toggle switches inward Calculate an average reading from the reference manometer in units of mmHg Enter this span value into the screen below Thermo Fisher Scientific Flow Calibration Auto Flow Calibration Mass Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Procedure e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Flow Pres Span Wi hid A AMPLIA Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more Repeat as necessary to within 2 mmHg The preferred method of flow rate calibration is t
69. 000 to maximum allowed by instrument Dutput Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Dutput Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error Response Function Code 1 Byte Function code 0x80 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported MODBUS Parameters Supported C 8 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON Request Field Name Function Dutput Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Response Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Table C 1 through Table C 3 lists the MODBUS addresses supported for the Model 50141 IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Coil status 1 indicates active state A Table C 1 Read Coils for 5014 Coil Number 0 Status INVALID 1 LOCAL REMOTE SERVICE NOT USED GEN ALARM on S Wy Ph CONC ALARM Thermo Fisher Scientific Coil Number Status MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Paramet
70. 00000 Figure B 1 Flags Field B 10 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarms C Link Protocol Commands Alarms pm This command reports the measured PM concentration The following example shows that the PM concentration is 14 1 mg m Send pm Receive pm 1 410E 01 mg m3 pm 24avg value This command reports the 24 hour averaging PM concentration value where value is a floating point number representing PM concentration in the currently selected units The following example reports the 24 hour PM concentration value Send pm 24avg Receive pm 24avg 10 000E 00 ug m3 alarm alpha count min alarm alpha count max These commands report the current alpha count alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the alpha count alarm minimum value is 200 Send alarm alpha count min Receive alarm alpha count min 200 set alarm alpha count min x set alarm alpha count max x These commands set the alpha count alarm minimum and maximum values to x where x is an integer representing alpha count limits The following example sets the alpha count alarm maximum value to 500 Send set alarm alpha count max 500 Receive set alarm alpha count max 500 ok alarm amb rh min alarm amb rh max These commands report the current ambient relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports the ambient relative humidit
71. 147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Board Temp gt Min or Max Pressure Vacuum The Pressure Vacuum Alarms submenu allows the user to view and set the Alarms pressure alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms Wi mbit Barometric Pressure The Barometric Pressure screen displays the current pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 400 to 800 mmHg If the barometric pressure reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Baro Pres Bs EEE o Bone nr Bat ad Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Barometric Pressure Limits Vacuum Min and Max Vacuum Limits 3 68 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual The Minimum Barometric Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum barometric pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum barometric pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Baro Pres gt Min or Max amg Lt ied fat The Vacuum screen displays the current vacuum readin
72. 16 ORANGE WHITE 34 GRAY GREEN 17 GREEN WHITE 35 GRAY RED 18 BLUE WHITE 36 GRAY VIOLET 19 VIOLET WHITE oy LIGHT GREEN BLACK Mounting Options The analyzer can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9 3 and shown in Figure 9 1 through Figure 9 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 9 3 Mounting Options Mounting Type Description Bench Positioned on bench includes mounting feet and front panel side trim handles EIA rack top position Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles Retrofit rack top Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front position panel ElA rack mounting handles This configuration is intended for direct replacement of a C series instrument in an existing rack The rail mounting location is lower on the case and the front mounting screw slots have non standard EIA locations Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 9 3 Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 REF Figure 9 1 Bench Mounting 9 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 9 5 Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack Mounting 9 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 4 Rack Moun
73. 27 e Photo Interrupt Board Replacement on page 7 29 e Proportional Valve Replacement on page 7 30 e Detector Assembly Replacement on page 7 31 e Flow RTD Replacement on page 7 33 e Transformer Replacement on page 7 34 e Radius Tube Replacement on page 7 35 e Ambient RH Temperature Replacement on page 7 36 e Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 38 e LCD Module Replacement on page 7 39 e Service Locations on page 7 41 7 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives 4 If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A The detector assembly should be replaced by a qualified technician knowledgeable in dealing with radiation precautions By removing the detector assembly the C 14 radioactive source is partially exposed Safety glassed must be worn during this replacement procedure The amount of C 14 meets the USNRC regulations as an exempt amount of radioactive source lt 100 XCi A CAUTION The detector window is very fragile Handle with great care and do not wipe or touch the window Furthermore do not touch
74. 3 35 Concentrato Nsei O edecnineed 3 35 Other Measurements tucan lid dcaci s 3 36 Analog Input da 3 37 TEPIP SEO ra RO a 3 37 Use DEP A E A A A 3 37 MA O a es Ca e 3 38 Neal Pace nc fact e lore nte ce eae 3 38 Default Gata 3 38 Host Name isnan sieer eraa ia eiia 3 39 Network Time Protocol Servera add 3 39 A A ee aren ose E a E 3 40 Output Relay Settings chet ae eave aan aa 3 40 Logic tii ti 3 40 Instrument States ua 3 41 Ad ti A AW tii 3 41 Non Adi did 3 42 Digital Inpue Settings eiiis ieksaa as 3 42 Logic State r iei E io 3 42 Instrument Action sec sss a 3 43 Analog Output Configuration Select Channel cesses 3 43 Allow Over Under Rca aaa 3 44 Analog Output Configuration Select Action ccooncninnmmmmm 3 44 a A O cn ONE NO 3 45 Minimum and Maximum Value nd ns 3 45 Choose Signal to Optio 3 46 Analog Input Confort tddi 3 48 Descriptor iichs aicdicsncuidasdedeitcipeseshdacists nE Aasa K ani eaoin 3 48 DES e E E A RI ahs 3 49 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual ix Contents x Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Decimal Places natal prieto 3 49 Number of Table DoldtS ico mimica 3 49 Table Pont ica 3 50 Volts iria 3 50 a A A ues oa She ta teat aA Lele aa 3 50 Sereen Contrastes c gh sca aa 3 51 Semice hi A ea Oe ea cua ge ae a ea ea 3 51 A 2cmaty Deceae A ATRAE ARTT 3 52 TAO O Oi ER 3 52 Diagnosti s Mentis dai 3 53 PROG RATA VETSIOUS is 3 53 MOLAR CS o A 3 54 Motherboard Voltage a iio 3 54 Interface Board Volt
75. 32 bit floats or 32 bit integers These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front panel display Normally the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be strongly related to the specifier used to display it such as all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an f output specifier and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a d specifier The first line of the layout response is the scanf like parameter list for parsing the fields from an ASCII erec response Parameters are separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a An the normal line separator character Valid fields are s parse a string d parse a decimal number ld parse a long 32 bit decimal number f parse a floating point number x parse a hexadecimal number lx parse a long 32 bit hex number ignore the field Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter it is handled automatically A The second line of the layout response is the binary parameter list for parsing the fields from a binary response Parameters MUST be separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n Valid fields are t parse a time specifier 2 bytes D parse a date specifier 3 bytes i ignore one 8 bit character 1 byte e parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes n x E parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 by
76. 57 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Alarm Information Translation Table Selection Table Button Designator B 58 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print For example the specifier b4 will print the lowest four bits of the parsed number There are serious restrictions on where an s field may appear currently sources 1 and 2 must be s and no others may be s The value source is followed by optional alarm information indicated by a commercial at sign with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long low and high The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source Typical alarm information would appear as 6 4 Then there appears an optional translation table within braces This is a string of words separated by spaces An example translation table would be Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 The value once extracted is used as a zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses This is a string of numbers separated by spaces 0 1 The selection table lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may
77. 6 12 13x local remote service service 0 1 Tset mode s n This is a line which has a title of Mode and value taken from the sixth field of the data response There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13 from the source the value type is not important here because the value is being translated to an output string Once the bits have been extracted they are shifted down to the bit zero position Thus the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3 The translation list shows the words which correspond to each input value the zero index value appearing first 0 gt local 1 gt remote etc The selection list shows that only the first two values in this case are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed The T button indicates full translation input code to string and user selection number to output string xC This is a line that starts a new column the xC or L Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp s n This shows that the bitfield end the second part of a bitfield specification is optional The bitfield will be one bit long starting in this case at the eleventh bit Background 7f 8Bd ddd set 03 bkg s n This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays The background value is taken from the 7th element and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th If the asterisk were not present it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be
78. 7 3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for connecting external devices such as PCs and dataloggers to an Series Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components Description Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional 102556 00 102645 00 102646 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37 optional Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6279 Cable RS 232 Six Feet optional 102888 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard 102891 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard 103084 00 Thermo Fisher Scientific Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M included with optional 1 0 Expansion Board Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing External Device Connection Components Primary Measurement Head Assy Detector Amp Tape Radius Guide Tape Guide Wheel Assy Filter Tape Supply Wheel Boa ilter Tape Supply Whee Radius Guide Counter Wheel Assy Counter Wheel Photo Interrupt Board Assy Spindle Tape Wheel Assy O Tube Mounting Block Assy pS Cam Final Assy FF Pr E Cam Photo Interrupt Board Pressure Board Proportional Valve w fitting Assy 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Digital Output Board Front Panel Front Panel Board i Motor w Photo
79. 8 28 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC 08 29 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC 08 30 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC 08 31 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC 08 32 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 23 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 24 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual lrec format srec format erec format These commands report the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data in various formats such as ASCII without text ASCII with text or binary The following example shows the output format for Irecs is ASCII with text according to Table B 3 Send lrec format Receive lrec format 1 set lrec format format set srec format format set erec format format These commands set the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data according
80. 85 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 2 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 2 CTS RS485 IN NC AC IN PJ1 gt w N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC 24VPWR PJ2 0 N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC INTF BD 6 12 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual PJ3 AC HOT AC NEUT Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 3 AC Ground Table 6 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator PUMP J1 AC Pump_AC AC Ground NC AC Heater2_AC AC Ground AC 2 Heater1_AC 3 AC Ground WDT DISABLE J4 1 Input 2 Ground AUX PWR 120V J5 1 AC 2 AC PURGE 2 J6 1 AC 2 Purge2_AC PURGE 1 J7 1 AC 2 Purge1_AC PUMP 1 J8 1 24V 2 Pump1_On Off JTAG INTF J9 1 TDO FP WO N HEATER 2 J2 w N HEATER 1 J3 oN OD om B amp B WN mn Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 14 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin gt gt gt gt e w N Signal Description Ground FLOW TEMP 2 Flow2A_RTD Flow2B_RTD Ground AUX HT 1 AC AuxHT_1_AC AUX HT 2 AC AuxHT_2_AC TT MOTOR AC TT Motor_AC PUMP 2 FLOW TEMP 1
81. A E A NI 3 18 Mass Limitiran adi iaa 3 18 Next Pimentel 3 18 o A A es 3 19 COMME AAA Oe 3 19 Volumetric Conditions oia iia ao 3 19 Temperature CoOnmpensatlO Misc dareiasioorroisndiia stands tercera 3 20 Standard do ES 3 20 Pressure Compendio in i 3 20 Standard Presi li da 3 21 Datalogging Settings nt iia 3 21 Select Shee reis 3 22 View Logged ata is ia 3 22 Number of RE COGS ects A a ta ea OR dake ak 3 23 Dated Times 3 23 Erase Logodna AS 3 24 Select Comitan iia 3 24 Choose Field Dita A Tasio 3 25 GTICEN ERATIONS ati tias 3 25 Other M essuremebisa ii ai 3 25 Analog PUES rot ta 3 27 Commit Contents 8 2 28 da aia 3 28 Reset to Default Contes 3 28 viii Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Configure Datalogic sita sacaeeaccatenetesaasentuctds 3 28 Logging Period Min sssessssesesesesesesesessrseseseststsrsrsrtrteereereeseseseees 3 29 Memory Allocation PE id a 3 29 Data Treatment ea 3 30 A A ncaa in tas ta 3 30 Communication Severe vs issiagsssicededecesssesades dvsscdentayseabeciaecsesssedets 3 30 Ayo Bs a Vossen nee Sr er RE IER oe re mea a 3 31 Dada dais 3 31 Data Dl rai 3 32 A AO 3 32 Stop PU die 3 32 RS 232 RS 485 Selection dois 3 33 List a A A eee 3 33 Gesytec Se al N nber ota atacan 3 34 Communication Protocol rta dios 3 34 Streaming Data Configuration cmd asa 3 34 Streaming Data Interval AAA Cae eta anu aun as 3 35 Choose Stream Dita detesto cese Seals
82. Analyzer instrument id This command reports the instrument identification 1D The following example reports the current setting of the instrument ID Send instrument id Receive instrument id 14 set instrument id value This command sets the instrument ID to value where value is an integer between 0 and 127 inclusive The following example shows the instrument ID changed to 12 Note Sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to use the new ID for subsequent commands A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Send set instrument id 12 Receive set instrument id 12 ok layout ack This command reports the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested according to Table B 9 The following example reports that the instrument is configured to do nothing Send layout ack Receive layout ack 0 set layout ack value This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested according to Table B 9 Send set layout ack Receive set layout ack ok Table B 9 Set Layout Ack Values Value Function 0 Do nothing default 1 Append power up mode This command reports the current power up mode setting to e
83. B 52 do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton B 34 dout Reports sets digital output channel and active state B 52 dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per B 53 channel en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B 34 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B 22 in the format specified in the commands erec Returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions B 22 measurements and status in the specified format erec format Reports sets erec format B 24 erec layout Reports current layout of erec data B 24 filter period Reports sets the number of hours to be added to filter next B 36 time for the filter tape change filter time Reports sets the next date and time of the filter tape change B 37 flags Reports current active measurement status flags in HEX B 10 flow Reports the current sample flow B 19 flow pres Reports the current flow pressure B 19 flow pres span Reports sets the flow pressure span B 31 flow pres zero Reports the flow pressure zero B 31 flow span Reports sets the current flow span B 32 flow target Reports sets the current flow B 37 flow temp Reports the current flow temperature B 19 flow temp offset Reports sets offset for flow temperature B 32 format Reports sets current reply termin
84. Beta Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Service Menu hl Flow Temperature The Flow Temperature screen allows the user to view and calibrate flow temperature Be sure to have the cover removed and equilibrated to room temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt RH Temp Calibration gt Flow Temp Ambient Relative The Ambient Relative Humidity screen allows the user to view and Humidity calibrate relative humidity Adjust the zero offset until the RH agrees with your treaceable standard e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt RH Temp Calibration gt Ambient RH Pressure Vacuum The Pressure Vacuum Calibration submenu allows the user to view and Calibration calibrate the pressure sensor and vacuum flow sensor The pressure vacuum calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter 3 74 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration Barometer Pressure The Barometer Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the Calibration barometer pressure span or reset default values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres Calibrate Barometer The Calibrate Baromete
85. C power source SHARP Connection Use the following procedure for SHARP connection bracket assembly Bracket Assembly Installation 1 Locate the Connection Bracket Figure 10 1 and remove two screws and set aside a pin SHARP onnect tor Figure 10 1 SHARP Optics Connection Bracket 2 Remove both sides of the Cover Remove the tape pick up spool Figure 10 2 by removing the thumb screw washer filter tape spacers o rings and rear filter support guide plate 10 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures Instrument Preparation STEPS 1 UNFASTEN THUMB NUT 2 SLIDE TAPE PICKUP SPOOL OFF 3 SLIDE TAPE ASSEMBLY OUT TO GAIN ACCESS TO SCREW AREA 4 4 FASTEN 2X SCREWS TO CONNECTION BRACKET THRU WALL PLATE 5 MAKE SURE CONNECTOR ORIENTATION CLOSER TO THIS EDGE Figure 10 2 Tape Pick up Spool Removal 3 Remove the two Philips screws from the connection bracket and align the bracket onto the wall plate as shown above in Step 4 and insert the two screws through the wall plate and tighten 4 Reinstall the tape pickup spool in the reverse order of removal in Step 2 by sliding all the spacers O rings and rear support guide plate into its original assembly order 5 Install the filter tape following the filter tape path shown in Figure 10 3 Use adhesive tape to adhere the filter tape to the take up spool
86. Channel gt Units PT oT ol A mt 4 E Cad f CH ciinii i ia mid Liit Decimal Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal point from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Decimal Places CH mtb Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many Thermo Fisher Scientific points are used in the analog input conversion table for the selected channel The instrument uses linear interpolation between the points in this table to determine what the reading value is based on the analog input voltage Each point in the table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Table Points Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table Points Volts User Value 3 50 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual PME ieee EE EE The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e Inthe Main Menu choose Inst
87. Continuous Ambient Particulate Monitor continuously measures the mass concentration of suspended and refined particulates e g TSP PMio PM25 and PM by the use of beta attenuation In addition the influence of natural Radon Rn 222 gas is corrected for as a mass refinement step allowing better sensitivity at lower ambient particulate concentrations In contrast to other beta attenuation monitors using Carbon 14 C 14 as a source of the beta rays the Model 5014 particulate sample collection area is located between both the C 14 source and the proportional counter While ambient particulate is being deposited onto a filter tape sample spot the dynamic filter loading is measured simultaneously by the attenuation of the C 14 source beta rays As a result of this configuration a continuous real time measurement of airborne particulate is provided It is not necessary to move the filter spot from the sample position to a separate detector position for zero and mass determinations old step wise method of beta attenuation monitors Therefore uncertainties associated with step wise filter transport are eliminated by the use of this continuous ambient particulate monitoring method Another unique design of the Model 50147 is that it takes into consideration background interferences with known beta attenuation methods When present the daughter nuclides of the natural noble gas Radon Rn 222 attach to airborne particulates which are then collec
88. Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header C 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Series instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS ADU Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS slave address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to 0x7F hex This address is only used for MODBUS RTU over serial connections Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device IDs 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP a MODBUS Application Protocol Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in respons
89. ETE EEEE an I O RANFOMR o ee ee 1 E OVACA 24NAC Opio 6 6 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams PJ34 p BETA 1 DETECTOR 425454008 pm BETA 2 DETECTOR 42545 Ea em SHARP 1 DETECTOR 1 PJ20 Hp SHARP 2 DETECTOR 105968 1139 LT THW 439 Hp I HWELL1 MISS 5 UU COUNTER WHEEL 00 p m Uf NHEEL 10 1331 Sip PRESSURE BOARD 10457800 1128 55 F BOARD TEMP THERM Z In PJS p HEATER 1_120 VAC 2 FIN E 7 PH Py2 HEATER 2_1 oO FIN ES 2 Bl PUMP 190 r Pd1 Ep PUMP 120 E PJ7 gt PURGE 1_120 Z on Ie t PJ6 oH LJPURGE 2_120 VAC 2 Pin po PJ pn ITT MOTOR 120 ee lor 2 pl a AT 10m ASPAS PJ5 gt Pin AUX POWER 120 L PJ11 pea T AUX HEAT 1 DATA A aid a IPJ45 t PJ12 yp AUX HEAT 2 3 Pin l i PJ21 5 EJ FAN a FIN PJ8 C PUMP 2 Pin PJ14 PUMP 2 Z in l Z Pas A PURGES_24VDC Z Fin 30 _ SPARE_24VDC FIA PU36 5 LOAD MOTOR_24VDC Zh PJ22 PURGE _24VDC es 2 Fir o _PJ43 PJ18 5 LJ PURGE2_24 3 Pin 4 FIA n M19 5 C IPUMP FLOW 1 3 Pin R gt TEMP WARD p 5 n AA J10 5 gt TEMP ez Ml rin 3 Pin MJ32 5 EMP RID zp VOLTAGE DIVIDER 1 ou J27 VOLTAGE DIVIDER 2
90. F the cover should be removed and the instrument should sample room temperature air at least one hour prior to calibrating The order of calibration described below is preferred for optimal performance of the 50147 and comes from many years of experience working with and developing ambient particulate monitoring instrumentation The Calibration submenus allow the user to view and calibrate the instrument All calibration submenus are visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in Chapter 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Procedure RH Temperature All screens that appear in this chapter have been referenced in the previous Calibration chapter Ambient Temperature Using a NIST traceable thermometer as a reference collocated next to the ambient RH temperature sensor assembly measure and compare three individual readings between both the reference and the 5014 response Taking an average of both sets of readings calculate the average difference between the two readings and record that as your offset This offset ZERO should now be entered in the screen below ERE CH perm WH mnie PS PHP ELSES Pi AG Lf bie Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more If it appears that the temperature has shifted into the wrong direction change the sign of your offset value Ambient Relative Using a NIST traceable hygro
91. Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad B 21 copy sp to Irec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into Irec list B 20 copy sp to srec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B 20 copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B 20 copy srec to sp Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B 21 copy stream to sp Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch B 21 pad crn Reports the current radon concentration B 18 custom Reports sets defined custom range concentration B 36 data treatment Irec Reports sets data treatment for concentration values in lrecs B 21 data treatment srec Reports sets data treatment for concentration values in srecs B 21 date Reports sets current date B 42 default params Sets parameters to default values B 42 det Reports sets the status of the detector board B 42 det status Reports the current mass for the detector B 18 dhcp Reports sets state of use of Dynamic Host Configuration B 47 Protocol DHCP diag volt det Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the detector board B 18 diag volt ob Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the I O expansion board B 18 diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the motherboard B 18 diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the measurement B 19 interface board dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B 52 din Reports sets digital input channel and active state
92. Mass Coefficient The Manual Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to adjust the mass coefficient used in beta attenuation Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 81 Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass gt Manual Alpha Efficiency The Alpha Efficiency Coefficient screen allows the user to view and set the Coefficient alpha efficiency value Note This value is set in the factory and should not be adjusted A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Alpha Eff Coefficient Detector Calibration The Detector Calibration submenu is used to view and set the detector calibration The detector calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode lt 4 see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician on a defined service interval and at least once per year or if the detector is replaced A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration 3 82 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Auto Detector Calibration The Auto Detector Calibration screen allows the user to conduct a detector optimization routine that will establish the optimal plateau for detector performance This process takes approximately 30 minutes and wil
93. Menu on page 3 15 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 52 e Alarms Menu on page 3 60 e Service Menu on page 3 72 e Password Menu on page 3 89 Display The 320 x 240 pixels graphics liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls help and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For these menus use Jand to move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons 3 0 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto NS The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Soft Keys Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function E Soft Keys The E soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys below Cr Run The Cv is used to display the Run screen The Run scr
94. Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Continuous Ambient Particulate Monitor Part Number 106428 00 2Apr2014 2009 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEERoHS WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about installing operating maintaining and servicing the Model 50147 Continuous Ambient Particulate Monitor It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage The manual
95. Note The optimal contrast will change with changes in temperature A Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD to another If the LCD is replaced the contrast may need to be reset A If the display contrast is not optimal but the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set the screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See contrast levels in Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands for more information on this command A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast Wi rh ivd RRS E mite TON EE dE a PME hae TEEN EE EUs EEE o Bose The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off Turning service mode ON locks out any remote actions and allows access to parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 51 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Date Time diagnosing the Model 50147 The service wrench icon on the status bar is shown when service mode is on For more information about the service mode see Service Menu later in this chapter Note The service mode should be turned off when finished as it prevents remote operation A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode The Date Time screen
96. Number Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 5014 analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet For details see the following topics e Instrument Identification Number on page B 1 e Commands on page B 2 e Measurements on page B 9 e Alarms on page B 11 e Diagnostics on page B 17 e Datalogging on page B 20 e Calibration on page B 27 e Keys Display on page B 34 e Measurement Configuration on page B 35 e Hardware Configuration on page B 41 e Communications Configuration on page B 43 e I O Configuration on page B 50 e Record Layout Definition on page B 55 Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent to the instrument s identification number plus 128 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 1 C Link Protocol Comm
97. Pull Out Tube Unfasten Screws 2 Figure 7 19 Replacing the Radius Tube Use the following procedure to replace the ambient RH temperature assembly Figure 7 20 Equipment Required Ambient RH temperature assembly Adjustable wrench Pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Ambient RH Temperature Replacement Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Remove the cable from the bottom of the radiation shield assembly that houses the ambient RH temperature assembly Remove the two mounting nuts on the mounting clamp of the radiation shield assembly Remove the radiation shield assembly Turn over the radiation shield assembly and remove the three thumb screws Remove the three spacers and mounting bracket Slide out the ambient RH temperature assembly Slide in the new ambient RH temperature assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement Remove RH Temperature Assembly 8 4 Unfasten Thumb Screws 3 Remove Cable Figure 7 20 Repl
98. SHARP 1 gt 0 N 24V Pump2_On Off Flow1A_RTD Flow1B_RTD Ground 24V RS485 RS485 Ground PURGE 2 DC 24V Purge2_DC PUMP FLOW 1 w nN 24V Aout_Pump1_Flow Ground SHARP 2 J20 gt WO N 24V RS485 RS485 Ground FAN J21 gt 24V Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Fan_Power PURGE 1 DC J22 24V Purge1_DC PUMP FLOW 2 J23 24V Aout_Pump2_Flow Ground PURGE 3 DC J25 24V Spare1_Sol VD1 J26 AIN_VD 1 Ground VD2 BOARD TEMP SPARE FLOW AIN_VD 2 Ground Board_Therm Ground 24V Aout_Spare_Flow Ground PURGE 4 DC J30 Rh 24V Spare2_Sol PRESS BD J31 OO aoa N on A WW N 15V AIN_30PSIA AIN_FLOW_1 AIN_VAC_2 AIN_FLOW_2 AIN_VAC_1 5V 15V Ground PRESS TEMP J32 w N Press_RID Press_RTD Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific CNTR WHEEL J33 5V Ground Ground Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 16 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator O N OQO oO fF Signal Description Ground VOA3 5V NC NC BETA 1 J34 o oO A N Ground RS485 RS485 Ground 5V Groun
99. Table 7 1 Model 50147 Replacement Parts ooooncocicicoccccinncccnccncnrncnnnncnrnnnooos 7 5 Table 7 2 Model 50147 Cables ccc ccccesceseesseseeseseesecesteseeseeseeseeteseeseesee 7 6 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Component cccccccceceseeneeeeees 1 7 Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 20 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 20 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configurati0N c cniocinic 8 10 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configurati0N o cnin inio 8 10 Jable 9 1 Cable DIS ca tantra ca 9 2 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables oocooocnoconio 9 3 Table 9 3 Mounting Options o ociconcicincinconinccnnncnnononnocncnnrnonocnnnocnrnncncnocnnnoss 9 3 Table B 1 Error Response Messages oocoococicicococonnnnconcnrnnnonocnrnnnonororannononoos B 3 Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands ooocooocicciccicionoocionioconnnocnnonroroorooinooos B 3 Table B 3 Record Output Formats oooicocincccinconinccnnocononocnnnccnnnornrnncnnnncnnnooo B 24 Table B 4 Stream Time ValueS ooooocooniciciciciononiocincononnnnonoornocnonnononoornoonos B 27 Table B 5 Standard RanNges oocoooninciniocininninnncinononononncnnncnnoncnrnocnrancnnnoos B 39 Table B 6 Contrast LevelS ooooococooicicicicononiocinconcnconocoonoooornocnonornonoornoonos B 41 Table B
100. Tube Adapter Install 6 Reassemble the two covers of the instrument in reverse order and check alignment of radius tube adapter through the hole in the cover as shown in Figure 10 6 Be sure to remove the old dust cover cap and the large plastic hole cover Figure 10 6 Radius Tube Adapter Alignment Check 10 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures SHARP External Valve Installation SHARP External Valve Installation Use the following procedure for SHARP external valve installation 1 Attach the SHARP External Valve Assembly which includes the to the Rear Panel using the captive hardware on bracket and attach the 3 pin connector to the rear panel labeled valve Figure 10 7 Port 2 Figure 10 7 Rear Valve Assembly Installation 2 Follow the following plumbing procedure in accordance with Figure 10 8 below a Attach the 3 8 vacuum tubing between pump intake and the vacuum port on rear panel and include the push to connect T fitting with the 0 040 thru hole on the T side in this line b From the valve assembly that is now attached to the rear panel connect the threaded fitting to the pump exhaust Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 10 7 Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures SHARP External Valve Installation c Connect the 3 8 tubing with inline HEPA filter to the available port Port 1 on the external val
101. X gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual D 3 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands If the received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the lt address gt does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored This is a sample command to switch the instrument to initiate a filter change instrument address 14 lt STX gt ST014 lt SP gt N lt CR gt Data Sampling Data This command initiates a data transfer from the instrument The Query Command instrument responds with measurement data which depends on the range DA mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA command below The command structure for a data query command is as follows lt STX gt DA lt address gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the lt address gt is left out then no space is al
102. a Instruction Manual B 27 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 28 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual alpha th This command reports the current value of alpha threshold for the detector The following example reports that the alpha threshold is 1220 Send alpha th Receive alpha th 1220 set alpha th value This command sets the alpha threshold for the detector to value where value is a floating point number representing the alpha threshold for the detector The following example sets the alpha threshold to 1250 Send set alpha th 1250 Receive set alpha th 1250 ok amb rh zero This command reports the current ambient RH zero in percent The following example reports that the ambient RH zero is 0 6 Send amb rh zero Receive amb rh zero 0 6 set amb rh zero value This command sets the ambient RH zero to value where value is a floating point number representing ambient RH zero in percent The following example sets the ambient RH zero to 7 Send set amb rh zero 7 Receive set amb rh zero 7 ok amb temp zero This command reports the current ambient temperature zero in degrees C The following example reports that the ambient temperature zero is 5 C Send amb temp zero Receive amb temp zero 5 0 degC set amb temp zero value This command sets the ambient temperature zero to value where value is a floating point number representing ambient temperature zero in degrees C The following example sets the ambien
103. a continuous concentration measurement of ambient particulate concentration Figure 1 1 provides a schematic of the components used within the Model 50147 Within the measurement chamber the four key components are 1 the proportional detector 2 particle collection onto a glass fiber filter tape 3 a vertical moving vacuum chamber plate and 4 the C beta source lt 100 pCi lt 3 7 Mbq Based on this schematic a description of operation is provided Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Principle of Operation INLET Ta RHa OL LLL HEATER DETECTOR FILTER TAPE B SOURCE ORIFICE PROPORTIONAL Y gt VALVE el VACUUM PUMP Figure 1 1 Model 5014 Flow Schematic 1 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation A clean filter spot is introduced by an automatic filter change to the combined sampling and detection chamber at least every 24 hours usually centered at midnight However the official filter tape change frequency for TUV and U S EPA testing for both PM25and PM is every 8 hours The automatic filter changes are controlled by the instrument firmware which halts the pump operation lowers the vacuum chamber plate advances the filter tape a fixed length raises the vacuum chamber plate and initiates the pump operation and a zeroing of the sample spot Immediately after a filter change a new measurement cycle i
104. acing the Ambient RH Temperature Assembly Front Panel Board Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 Replacement 7 Equipment Required Eront panel board Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 7 38 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing LCD Module Replacement 3 Pop the board off of the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following the previous steps in reverse LCD Module LCD Module Screws 2 BE Retaining Screw Mounting Studs 2 Ribbon Cables 3 lt Eatme Bottom Support Figure 7 21 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 21 Re p lacement Equipment Required LCD module Philips screwdriver your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact it off immediately using soap and water A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Ins
105. ack to the original list Refer to the sp field command for information on how to edit the scratch pad The following example shows the list for streaming data output Send list stream Receive list stream field index variable X x time lrec srec lrec rec num srec rec num lexy rec num Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging SEXY rec num lrec aa bb 00 pp qq yy srec aa bb 00 pp qq yy rec The starting record index number 1 most recent num The number of records to return 1 to 10 x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set lrec srec format format command aa hours 01 to 23 bb minutes 01 to 59 oo month 01 to 12 pp day 01 to 31 qq year These commands output lrec or srec logged data The output format is determined by the set Irec format and set srec format commands The logging time is determined by the set Irec per and set srec per commands In the following example assume there are 740 lrecs currently stored in memory When the command lrec 100 5 is sent the instrument counts back 100 records from the last record collected record 740 and then returns 5 records 640 641 642 643 and 644 For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Send lrec 5 Receive lrec 100 5 0
106. aee saasedsdaactateceasicnseaseears 3 80 Nase Cae ticle i E E EEE nt heise 3 81 Auto Mass Cos Ha ia 3 81 Manual Mass Costhcient ii 3 81 Alpha Efficiency O A tes cncceaee eh 3 82 Detector Calibration daa daa ata 3 82 Auto Detector Cabrio neon ee einianrien as 3 83 Manual Detector Calibracion 3 83 Bera Ref Alpha Counts vota iaa di 3 83 A A RAA bach c hcaba caves cies 3 84 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual xi Contents A teas at ENN 3 84 Alpha Threshold vrs rita ii tias 3 84 Analog Output Calibration aia iia 3 85 Analog Output Calibrate Zero innata 3 85 Analog Output Calibrate Full Salen so ea 3 86 Analog Input Calibration iaa di aida 3 86 Analog Input Calibrate Zero o ha teehee ads E 3 87 Analog Input Calibrate FullS tale arca 3 87 Display Pixel Testunianiin lia 3 88 Restore User Defaults apo tit aa 3 88 Restore Factory Detalla aleta us 3 88 Password Men o ls dl dea 3 89 DT PASS WOH A oi E elo pcan ie ees eae Sateen 3 89 Lock Instrument lic A 3 90 Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation cccoccocnconononccnnnnancnnons 3 90 Change Password soii id 3 90 Remove Password A O 3 91 Unlock Astrea olle orale scada 3 91 Chapter 4 GaliliFation ARS 4 1 Frequency of Cabra 4 1 EQuipment Req irediy a E oes 4 1 PARA I RATIO Nhe aa eaten ae Gl ce ONREG 4 2 Calibration Procedure veni ada 4 2 RH Temperature Calibration Laia dico arated aeags 4 3 Ambient Temperatura 4 3 Ambient Relative aid una 4 3 Flow Femperatare nai tna tach te eee 4 4
107. ages cin 3 54 WO Bead Voltages naian an 3 55 Detector Board Voltages ui 3 55 RH Temp rat tes srini a ii ioii 3 55 Pressure Vacuum isi aniran na oeo t sE a rai aai 3 56 BLOWS eane ete dase a whan r A etme Lore aS 3 56 Detector SES cial rilo eln ieas 3 56 RA E A 3 57 Analog Input Recados nia tal ies eii 3 57 Analog Input Voltages vita de id ica 3 57 AA O aon na meen Ra rT eer 3 58 A ea e S Saad crate een E Seren diane 3 58 Test Analog Outputs iii 3 58 S t Analog Outputs nt ds 3 59 Instrument Configuration iaa da 3 59 Contact ona e iii 3 60 Al rms Men s gisan eons E A RS 3 60 Instr ment Alarms eiieeii p aiii E 3 61 Filter Tape Coun ter eea nenia eE R Nis 3 61 Max Filter Tape Counter iia 3 61 Detector Alar alo idad 3 62 Min and Max Alpha Alarms escorias 3 62 Min and Max Beta Alarms ea dol 3 62 RE Temperature Alarms csc cites cts Glee aa a 3 63 Ambient RH a iba 3 63 Min and Max Ambient RH Limits scrccccthtcattentearnduce 3 63 Sample RH iii 3 64 Min and Max Sample RH Lis A 3 64 Ambient Vempervtute jee aint tied dada s 3 65 Min and Max Ambient Temperature Limits 4 2 2stecadtaera ek 3 65 Flow Temp rature nada 3 65 Min and Max Flow Temperature Limits coononcnncncnnonnnnannnncnnnnnnono 3 66 Board Lemperiture nl AARG S 3 66 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Min and Max Board Temperature Limits 3 66 Pressure Vacuum MAS 3 67 Barometric Pri odia 3 67 Min and Max Barometric Pressure Limits
108. air kit contains instructions for rebuilding the pump See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts Perform the Leak Test procedure that follows Leak Test This leak test procedure uses a volumetric flow meter and a custom leak 5 6 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual check adapter Use the following procedure to verify no leaks 1 Place a reference volumetric flow meter e g BGI Delta Cal onto the inlet adapter and calibrate the 5014 so that the reference flow meter and the 5014 monitor read the same flow rate 2 Install the custom leak check adapter onto the inlet adapter and then place the reference flow meter onto the leak check adapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Filter Tape Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A 3 Preventive Maintenance Filter Tape Replacement Record the reference volumetric flow meter reading and the instant flow reading If the difference between both readings is less than 0 42 L min 2 5 the leak check passes Use the following procedure to replace the filter tape in case of breaks or if the tape runs out Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Remove left side cover 2 From the main menu choose Inst
109. alarm flow temp min value set alarm flow temp max value This command sets the flow temperature alarm maximum value to value where value is a floating point number representing flow temperature alarm limits in C The following example sets the flow temperature alarm maximum value to 70 C Send set alarm flow temp max 70 0 Receive set alarm flow temp max 70 0 ok Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 15 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 16 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual alarm ib status This command reports the status of the interface board as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the interface board status is OK Send alarm ib status Receive alarm ib status ok alarm io status This command reports the status of the I O expansion board as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the I O expansion board status is OK Send alarm io status Receive alarm io status ok alarm mb status This command reports the status of the motherboard as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the motherboard status is OK Send alarm mb status Receive alarm mb status ok alarm sample rh min alarm sample rh max These commands report the current sample relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the sample relative humidity alarm minimum value is 5 Send alarm sample rh min Receive alarm sample rh min 5 0 set alarm sample rh min value set alarm
110. allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Date Time Timezone 3 52 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual The Timezone screen is used to set the timezone for the Network Time Protocol NTP server This should be set to the timezone that the instrument is located in If the exact timezone is not shown in the list it may be entered via the C LINK tz command see Appendix B The selections are UTC GMT EST GMT 5 CST GMT 6 MST GMT 7 PST GMT 8 YST GMT 9 HST GMT 10 NST GMT 11 DLW GMT 12 CET GMT 1 EET GMT 2 BST GMT 3 DLT GMT 4 ECH GMT 5 FOX GMT 6 GLF GMT 7 CCT GMT 8 JST GMT 9 GST GMT 10 LMA GMT 11 DLE GMT 12 EDT GMT 5 4 CDT GMT 6 5 MDT GMT 7 6 and PDT GMT 8 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Note The current timezone may say NULL before the timezone is set for the first time or if the timezone was cleared with a C Link command A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Timezone Wi mid Pin Pari i Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument The analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the I O expansion board option
111. an damage the detector A Safety glasses must be worn while replacing the detector assembly A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the SHV connector from the detector amplifier assembly and slide throught the wall plate 3 Loosen both detector mounting screws and slowly lift the detector assembly 4 Install the new detector assembly by following the previous steps in reverse while taking special care not to puncture the mylar 5 Calibrate the detector assembly Refer to the Detector Calibration procedure on page 4 12 7 32 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Flow RTD Replacement Unhook SHV Connector Unfasten Screws 2 Figure 7 16 Replacing the Detector Assembly Flow RTD Use the following procedure to replace the flow resistive temperature Replacement diction RTD see Figure 7 17 Equipment Required Sample flow RTD Adjustable wrench amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Refer t
112. an end of line character Concentrations n This is a single text only line An This is a single blank line NO 3s n This is a line which appears slightly indented The text field is NO the value is taken from the third element of the data response and interpreted as a string NO 18sBd ddd set no coef s n This is a line which also appears slightly indented The next field is also NO but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data response again interpreted as a string A button appears on this line which when pressed pops up an input dialog which will state Please enter a new value for NO using a d ddd format The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command If the user enters for example 1 234 the constructed command will be set no coef 1 234 NO 21f Code_0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code_7 Code _8 Code_9 Code_10 Code 11 Lset range no d n This is a line which appears slightly indented the title is again NO and the value is the twenty first element of the data response interpreted as a floating point number There is a no translation button which creates a selection list of twelve Code nn options The number of the user selection is used to create the output command Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 59 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition B 60 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Mode
113. and variables B 54 Ir Reports the last Irec stored B 22 Irec Reports maximum number of lrecs B 22 Irec format Reports sets output format for Irecs ASCII or binary B 24 Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data B 24 Irec mem size Reports maximum number of lrecs that can be stored B 24 Irec per Reports sets Irec logging period B 25 malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for Irecs B 25 malloc srec Reports sets memory allocation for srecs B 25 mass Reports the presence of mass B 19 mass coef Reports sets the current mass coefficient B 32 mass limit Reports sets the current filter mass limit B 38 me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B 34 no of Irec Reports number of Irecs stored in memory B 26 no or srec Reports number of srecs stored in memory B 26 pm Reports the measured PM concentration B 11 pm 24avg Reports the 24 hour average PM concentration B 11 power up mode Reports sets the power up mode as local or remote B 49 pres comp Reports sets pressure compensation to actual or standard B 38 pres std Reports sets the standard pressure B 38 program no Reports analyzer program number B 50 pump Reports sets pump on or off B 42 push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B 34 range Reports sets current PM range B 39 relay Sets relay logic status for the designated relay s B 55 relay stat Reports relay logic status for all relay s B 55 reset tape counter Resets the tape count to zero B 20 rh th Reports sets the current relative humid
114. ands Commands Commands B 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual For example if the instrument ID is set to 14 then each command must begin with the ACSII character code 142 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number If the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Chapter 3 Operation The analyzer must be in the remote mode and service mode not active in order to change instrument parameters remotely However the command set mode remote can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode Report commands commands that don t begin with set can be issued either in the remote or local mode regardless of the service mode setting For information on changing modes see Chapter 3 Operation The commands are not case sensitive Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the following example begins with the ASCII character code 142 decimal which directs the command to the Model 50144 and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal Many of the commands have two forms One form reads parameter from the instrument s memory and the other writes or updates a parameter The syntax for a write command adds the word set in front of the command and provides an argument Command
115. arometric Pressure Span iv Check Calibrate Flow Calibration Perform a Auto Detector Calibration 30 minutes Perform a Mass Foil Calibration factory calibrated Mass Coefficients are set at the factory Data Conte Nt Please use Port to access data download from the instrument Shutdown Use the following procedure when shutting down the instrument 1 Turn the power OFF 2 Cover instrument ports when not in use Important Tips DO NoT e Do not pressurize the monitor e Do not allow liquids to enter the sample port e Do not expose the instrument to excessive vibration or magnetic interference e Do not remove adjust the beta attenuation bench of the 50147 e Do not remove the C 14 radioactive source at any time 2 22 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Important Tips DO e Operate the instrument in a climate controlled environment 4 50 C e Set DHCP to ON when changing the IP address Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 23 Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display screens front panel pushbuttons and menu driven firmware For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Firmware Overview on page 3 4 e Range Menu on page 3 9 e 24 Hour Average on page 3 13 e Calibration Factors Menu on page 3 13 e Instrument Controls
116. at the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts Ifa period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts sha
117. atic electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the fan guard and filter from the fan by unsnapping it 3 Ifthe fan is not being replaced install the new filter and snap it back into place and skip the remaining steps 4 Disconnect the fan power cable from the fan Do not lose the four nuts 5 Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan 6 Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing Detector Amplifier Assembly Replacement FAN CABLE INSERTED THIS WAY ae EXTERIOR SIDE OF REAR PANEL Mounting Screws 4 REFER TO STICKER AIRFLOW FOR POSITIONING OF FAN Filter Fan Guard Keps Nuts 4 aes Figure 7 4 Replacing the Fan Detector Amplifier Use the following procedure to replace the detector preamplifier assembly Assembly Figure 7 5 Replacement aPment Required Detector amplifier assembly Philips screwdriver Adjustable wrench amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the cable from the detector amplifi
118. ation format B 47 he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton B 34 high volt Reports sets the current high voltage for the detector B 32 host name Reports sets host name string B 48 ht control Reports sets the current status of the heater B 37 instr name Reports instrument name B 48 instrument id Reports sets instrument id B 48 io bd Reports sets the presense of the 1 0 expansion board B 19 isc iscreen Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display B 34 layout ack Reports disables stale layout layout changed indicator B 49 le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton B 34 list din Lists current selection for digital inputs B 54 list dout Lists current selection for digital outputs B 54 list Irec Lists current selection Irec logging data B 22 list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B 22 list srec Lists current selection srec logging data B 22 list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B 22 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 7 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 8 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Command Description Page list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables B 54 list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables B 54 list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables B 54 list var log Reports a list of datalogging index numbers
119. be displayed Then there appears an optional button designator This will be one of B T IAR Ts or N B Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format The input format is specified from the B through the subsequent semicolon I Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation That is the values read are translated before they are compared to the selection list options L Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any translation The output value is the number of the selected option T Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition N Indicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to the instrument No user prompting happens The following string through an optional or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection The command string should normally contain print style formatting to include the user input Ifa is present it indicates a command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update the value field Examples Some examples n is the C syntax for
120. ble D 1 and Table D 2 below lt SFKT gt is the space provided for future use for special function It currently contains a string of ten 0 s i e lt 0000000000 gt Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual D 5 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands D 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual The Gesytec serial number defaults to zero To set the Gesytec serial number select Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Gesytec Serial No Example of response to DA command from an instrument with Gesytec serial number set to 000 The Gesytec serial number is bold in the example Gesytec Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 002 lt SP gt 1 T t Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP d t T Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 0000000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt Example of response to DA command from an instrument with Gesytec serial number set to 123 The Gesytec serial number is bold in the example Gesytec Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error S
121. box or a selection list There are five kinds of buttons B I L T and N Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display The layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands The first field in the layout string is the text It is delimited by a The string up to the first will be read and inserted in the text field of the line This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place a string into the value field The value source which is the item or word number in the DATA EREC response appears next This is followed by an optional bitfield designator The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string s hexadecimal x decimal d floating point f or binary b number Typically bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf s f format for example a field of 4 would be translated into the printf command of 3f Alternately the special character specifier this causes an indirection on the precision specifier which now becomes a field number can precede the precision This is useful when formatting for example numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B
122. bration span point Note The operator should use an independent manometer capable of measuring approximately 100 mmHg of vacuum Measure the vacuum under the filter tape from the positive AP port on the rear panel of the instrument and enter the value on this screen before calibrating A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Vac Pres Span ERE i E porr i Wi mid PS PEP ERS Pi AG A dc Calibrate Flow Pressure The Flow Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow Span sensor calibration span point Note The operator should use an independent manometer capable of 30 mmHg AP to measure the differential pressure across the orifice using the positive and negative AP ports on the rear panel and enter the value on this screen before calibrating A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Flow Pres Span Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Service Menu Restore Default The Restore Default Calibration screen allows the user to reset the default Calibration values Note Be sure to close the toggle switch after calibration is complete A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Set Defaults Ea mh drs Py Tit EH GED yi e Ad io bet d Pike tii i ili PS PHP ESE HiFi Flow Calibration The Flow Calibration submenu is used to view and
123. c electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement 7 28 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Mounting Studs 2 Lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Unplug all connectors from the measurement interface board Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate re connection Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board Pop the measurement interface board off from the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board To install the measurement interface board follow the previous steps in reverse Re install the measurement case assembly Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Mounting Screws 2 Figure 7 13 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Photo Interrupt Board Replacement Photo Interru pt Use the following procedure to replace the photo interrupt board Figure Board Replacement Equipment Required Photo interrupt board Hex driver 3 32 inch Philips head screwdriver 1 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap
124. centration factor KB filter change dust load in ug KD filter change cycle in hours KG external heating KH set point air flow regulation in l h KU establishes the RH target value KT establishes the temp target value K norm Pressure K norm Temp Y write parameters to EEPROM Table E 3 Control Commands for 5014i Command Description A pump off E pump on F filter change Thermo Fisher Scientific
125. ches to that height to allow for overall height of the 50147 monitor Next allow approximately 40 inches to attach the heated sample tube to the top of the 5014 via 5 8 inch OD tubing unions that use Teflon ferrules 8 7 221 5 9 7 246 0 Figure 2 3 Model 5014 Side View inches millimeters It is also important to locate the roof flange installation in vertical alignment with the inlet of the instrument By reviewing the top view drawing of the instrument Figure 2 3 the roof flange must be centered in direct alignment with the 5 8 inch OD tube entering the 50147 instrument Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 9 Installation Setup 17 3 440 4 16 8 425 5 5 0 127 3 2 0 50 8 22 3 566 0 23 5 596 0 Figure 2 4 Model 50147 Top View inches millimeters Heater Once the x y coordinates of the instrument and roof flange system are established and a waterproof flange system has been installed perform a dry run by attaching the heated sample tube on top of the 5014 base If the heated tube protrudes through the roof flange either the instrument should be lowered or an elongated PVC sleeve and cap system should cover the heater while maintaining a waterproof seal However for the remainder of this description it is assumed the heater will fit within the ceiling height of the air monitoring station Based on the vertical height requirements use additional 5 8 inch OD stainless tubing
126. ck instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Unlock Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 91 Frequency of Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required Chapter 4 Calibration The Model 5014 is an instrument that can make accurate mass concentration measurements of PM o PM 5 and PM o However with all electronic instruments the accuracy of the measurements depends on proper calibration In general terms calibration also called standardization is the process that establishes the relationship between sensor output signals and the parameter the operator is attempting to measure The 5014 instrument uses sensors that measure temperature humidity pressure and radiation This chapter describes the procedures for performing the necessary sensor calibrations This chapter is also a follow up to the Acceptance Testing outlined in the Installation chapter and a continuation of the menu display descriptions in the Operation chapter Each instrument is calibrated and tested for accuracy at the factory The mass calibration is conducted with a set of NIST traceable mass calibration foils The radiation detector is calibrated against certified check sources for beta and alpha emissions The temperature relative humidity pressure and flow rate are all calibrated against NIST traceable standards It is recommended
127. closed position of the measurement head This is connected to a motor assembly used to open and close the measurement head This small printed circuit board is mounted onto a chopper wheel that measures the amount of filter tape advanced during a filter tape change The proportional valve is a proportional solenoid valve that is used as a means of flow control In response to the measured flow across a subsonic orifice the proportional valve will either partially open or close to make a flow adjustment in real time This motor is used to drive the cam to rotate By rotating the cam the measurement head lever arm is raised and lowered for opening and closing the measurement head during a filter tape change After the measurement head is opened this motor is used to advance the filter tape a fixed amount prior to initiating another beta attenuation event on a fixed sample spot This PCB assembly is mounted on the floor plate and has three pressure sensors attached The pressure board is used to measure the barometric pressure differential pressure across the orifice and vacuum under the filter tap All tubing attached to the pressure board is numbered in case of the need to swap out this board Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 8 3 System Description Firmware Firmware Instrument Control Monitoring Signals Output Communication 8 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual The processor firmware tasks are organized into four a
128. cnnoncnnrnconrnnconos 7 25 Figure 7 13 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board 7 28 Figure 7 14 Replacing the Photo Interrupt Board oooooco ocininocconioo 7 29 Figure 7 15 Replacing the Proportional Valve oo ccccceseesceteseseeteneseseees 7 31 Figure 7 16 Replacing the Detector Assembly oococooioinonoiininicccninnnonooo 7 33 Figure 7 17 Replacing the RTD ooocococococococccnnococcconrnnnonncnrnnnonorarnnnonororannonoroso 7 34 Figure 7 18 Replacing the Transformer ocococicococcccincncocnnncnnncnrnononocornnnnnonoso 7 35 Figure 7 19 Replacing the Radius Tube ou ccc cece ceceesestetesesesceteseseees 7 36 Figure 7 20 Replacing the Ambient RH Temperature Assembly 7 38 Figure 7 21 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 39 Figure 8 1 Hardware Components cccccccccscesescssestesescesesesesteseeeseeeseeseees 8 2 Figure 9 1 Bench MOUNtIND ocoocononcininononnnnnnnononcnnnnnocnronnononorannononorannonornrannoos 9 4 Figure 9 2 EIA Rack MOUNTING oocoococicinococnnncononononononoronnononornnnononoronnonocoronnonos 9 5 Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack MOUNTING oooocooicononononncncnncnnncnncnrnnononoronnonorornnnonos 9 6 Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly oococconicocncocinincnnccninncnnnncnnosoo 9 7 Figure 9 5 Roof Flange Assembly oooococoococicccoccconococononrncnncornnonnocoronnonororonnonos 9
129. compensation is for actual or standard conditions The following example shows the temperature compensation is standard Send temp comp Receive temp comp std set temp comp selection selection act std These commands turn the temperature compensation to either actual or standard conditions The following example turns the temperature compensation to actual Send set temp comp act Receive set temp comp act ok temp std This command reports the standard temperature The following example reports that the standard temperature is 18 C Send temp std Receive temp std 18 degC set temp std value This command sets the standard temperature to value where value is a floating point number representation of standard temperature between 0 to 25 C The following example sets the standard temperature to 15 C Send set temp std Receive set temp std 15 ok temp th This command reports the heater temperature threshold for the sample The following example reports that the temperature threshold is 30 C Send temp th Receive temp th 30 degC Thermo Fisher Scientific Hardware Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration set temp th value This command sets the heater temperature threshold for the sample to value where value is a floating point number representation of temperature threshold between 0 to 70 C The following example sets the temperature threshold to
130. creen is used to change the maximum filter tape counter alarm limit 480 90 usage 10 remaining e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Instrument Alarms gt Filter Tape Counter gt Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Alarms Menu 3 62 Detector Alarms Min and Max Alpha Alarms Min and Max Beta Alarms Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual The Detector Alarms submenu allows the user to view a set of alarms for detector boards Board status indicates that the power supplies are working and connections are successful There are no setting screens for this alarm e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Detector Alarms The Alpha Alarms screen allows the user to view the minimum and maximum alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 100 If the alpha count reading goes beyond the maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Detector Alarms gt Alpha The Beat Alarms screen allows the user to view the minimum and maximum alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 5000 to 20000 If the beta count reading goes beyond the maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Detector Alarms gt Beta Thermo Fisher Sc
131. crews and lift out the transformer assembly 4 Install the new transformer by following the previous steps in reverse Unhook Short Cable from Transformer from Common Electronic Board AC INT BD Unhook Long Cable from Transformer to back of Unfasten Screws 4 Measurement Interface Board Figure 7 18 Replacing the Transformer Radius Tube Use the following procedure to replace the radius tube Figure 7 19 Rep lacement Equipment Required Radius tube assembly Hex driver 9 16 inch Hex driver 7 64 inch amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing Ambient RH Temperature Replacement Ambient RH Temperature Replacement 7 36 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 Loosen the two screws of the radius mounting block using a 9 16 inch hex driver 3 Loosen the two mounting screws on the measurement head assembly Remove tube by slightly turning side to side while pulling 4 Verify the sealing o ring is in position before sliding the new radius tube assembly into the measurement head 5 Install the new radius tube assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Unfasten Screws 2
132. ction RS 485 Connection 8 10 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Data Format 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits No odd or even parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with automatic flow control SD Refer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Ethernet Connection External Accessory Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector System Description 1 0 Components An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressin
133. ction Manual 10 9 Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures Upgrade of the Heater Tube Assembly Upg rade of the Usethe following procedure for upgrade of the heater tube assembly Heater Tube Assembly 1 The heater assembly needs to be revised for the 5030 SHARP to include a ferrite bead and a small faraday cage The four steps shown below in Figure 10 11 and Figure 10 12 should be used to modify the heater assembly Note The sample downtube should be slightly loose at the roof line to allow vertical play while working on this assembly If the tubing height has changed and needs to be cut back please cut and clean the tubing before attaching to the optical assembly A Collar i Figure 10 11 Upgrading 50307 Heater Assembly 10 10 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures Model Label Change Figure 10 12 Connecting Heater to Optics Assembly Cover Model Label use the following procedure for model label change Change 1 Remove the 50147 label and replace with the new 5030 SHARP Label on the front panel Front Panel in accordance with Figure 10 13 below FRONT FRAME FRONT FRAME LOWER FIXING HOLE REFERENCE 101614 00 JIG Figure 10 13 Front Panel Label Replacement Power On Upgrade is complete Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual 10 11 Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix A Warranty Seller warrants th
134. culate concentrations compared to similar methods Furthermore from this information the activity concentration of the natural noble gas Radon is derived The measurement chamber houses an RTD temperature sensor The T sensor directly measures the temperature of the incoming sample stream for a continuous air mass compensation and the flow system The flow and ambient sensor measurements are combined within a firmware algorithm to maintain an accurate measurement and control of volumetric flow at the inlet and through the differential orifice The Model 5014 also includes three pressure sensors to measure the differential pressure across a subsonic orifice vacuum under the filter tape and barometric pressure The flow P sensor is solely used for measurement at the orifice for flow rate control The vacuum sensor is used for air mass compensation as an indicator for clogging of the system and is included in Thermo Fisher Scientific Specifications Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications the volumetric flow control The barometric P sensor is used for air mass compensation and for volumetric flow rate regulation The volumetric flow system is built on a calibrated feedback signal from the CPU to the proportional valve signal By using this flow control flow stability is easily maintained Table 1 1 lists the specifications for the Model 5014i Table 1 1 Model 50147 Specifications Safety Electrical Designati
135. d BETA 2 J35 o oO A WO N Ground RS485 RS485 Ground 5V Ground LOAD MOTOR J36 24V Load_Motor_On SP PHOTO J37 gt oao FP 0 N 5V Ground Ground 5V VO_SP CAM WHEEL J38 YN 0 om A O N 5V Ground Ground NC Dig_Slit 5V NC HWELL 1 J39 AIN_RTDP 5V AIN_RHP_Hum Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 4 Ground SAMPLE 2 TEMP J40 1 SampleZA_RTD 2 Sample2B_RTD 3 Ground SAMPLE 1 TEMP J41 1 Sample1A_RTD 2 Sample1B_RTD 3 Ground TEST RTD J42 1 SpareA_RTD 2 SpareB_RTD 3 Ground AC IN J43 1 AC 2 AC 3 AC Ground 24V IN J44 1 24V 2 Ground DATA J45 1 Ground 2 RS485 3 RS485 Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram Connector Label MOTHERBOARD Reference Designator J1 Pin o 0 N oon A UO N gt o Signal Description Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 17 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 12 LD6 LCD Signal 13 LD2 LCD Signal 14 LD7 LCD Signal 15 LD3 LCD Signal 16 LCD Bias Voltagel 17 5V 18 Gro
136. d Connectors located on the measurement interface board include Data communication with the motherboard e 24 Vand 120 VAC power supply inputs e Fan and solenoid outputs e 120 VAC output and thermistor input from the sample heater e Flow and pressure sensor inputs e Proportional valve output e Optical pickup input e Pre amp board e Ambient temperature RTD and RH e FlowRTDs The flow sensor system consists of a subsonic orifice inside the primary measurement head a differential pressure and vacuum sensors and a flow temperature RTD The flow system output is produced by measuring the pressure difference across a precision orifice This unit is used for measuring the flow of sample gas in the measurement system The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing three pressure transducers with tube connections The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air pressure The detector amplifier assembly amplifies the signal from the proportional detector that receives beta particle emissions from the C 14 source through the sample and filter tape The output of the detector amplifier is fed to the measurement interface board A coaxial cable from the detector amplifier supplies power and grounding to the detector Thermo Fisher Scientific Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Front Panel Connector Board 1 0 Component
137. d a From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Under Instrument Controls m a iii iv Filter Tape Period should be set to 8 hours for PM25and PMso me vi a vii ii Flow should be set to 16 67 LPM Heater Control should be set to RH with a RH threshold of 50 58 For lower RH threshold settings please contact technical support Filter Tape mass limit should be set to 1 500 ug Filter Tape Next Time this should have a start date U S EPA applications may adjust this value as high as 24 hours for PM only However 8 hours is recommended for consistent performance Volumetric Conditions should be set to ACT for both Temp and Press Lrecs and Srecs should be chosen for datalogging and all parameters should be selected in the order they appear from Concentrations to Other Measurements Default Lrecs are Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 21 Installation Data Content set to 60 minute logging with 30 memory and Srecs are 5 minute logging with 70 memory allocated If there are any changes be sure to Commit Content b From the Main Menu choose Service Under Service Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A m vi vii Check Calibrate Ambient Temperature Sample Temperature and Flow Temperature ii Check Calibrate Ambient RH iii Check Calibrate B
138. del 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 21 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 22 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual erec erxy x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set erec format format command These commands return a snapshot of the main operating conditions measurements and status at the time the command is issued The following example shows a typical response The format is defined within the command in the case of erxy by the current settings of the format and erec format commands in the case of erec For details on erec formatting see the Record Layout Definition section at the end of this appendix For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Send erec Receive erec 07 53 05 04 09 flags 110000 PM 0 000 1 24Hr Avg PM 0 000 1 Coef A 1 000 Bkg A 0 000 Range A 10000 000 Flow A 0 000 6 5 3 1 1 1 O Temp Threshold A 30 000 Temp Threshold A 35 000 list Irec list srec list stream list sp These commands report the list of current selections for lrec logging data srec logging data streaming data output or the scratch pad sp list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad b
139. des parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations at the end of this chapter This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 7 3 e Firmware Updates on page 7 4 e Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 e Replacement Parts List on page 7 5 e Cable List on page 7 6 e External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 e Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 9 e Fuse Replacement on page 7 10 e Fan Filter Replacement on page 7 11 e Detector Amplifier Assembly Replacement on page 7 12 e Detector Amplifier Board Calibration on page 7 13 e External Pump Replacement on page 7 14 e Pressure Board Replacement on page 7 15 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 1 Servicing Service Locations e Pressure Board Calibration on page 7 17 e Analog Output Testing on page 7 18 e Analog Output Calibration on page 7 20 e Analog Input Calibration on page 7 21 e Themistor Replacement on page 7 23 e I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 24 e Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 26 e Motherboard Replacement on page 7 26 e Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7
140. ds The one second average of the other analog inputs are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents the concentrations simultaneously The display is updated every 1 10 seconds depending on the averaging time The analog output ranges are user selectable via firmware The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range Negative Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Electronics Motherboard System Description Electronics concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 5 of full scale The zero and span values may be set by the user to any desired value All electronics operate from a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over the all specified ranges External pumps and heaters all operate on 110 VAC An optional transformer is required if operating on the 210 250 range An on off switch controls all power to the analyzer and is accessible on the front panel The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies and a sub processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel function keys and or over I O connections on the r
141. e Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol Function Codes A slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols include device addressing The unit identifier is not used by the instrument The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are supported by the instrument Read Coils 0x01 Read Inputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x03 Read Input Registers 0x04 Force Write Single Coil 0x05 0x06 Read Exception Status If a function code is received that is not in this list an invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Function Codes below In MODBUS over serial an error check is included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the Model 5014i Read Coils Inputs read the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes
142. e change would be scheduled after the number of hours the period is set for The official tape change for TUV and U S EPA for PM25 and PM n is set for 8 hours e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Period Counter The Counter screen allows the user to record the current filter tape count and reset the tape count to zero e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Counter Parma WH rnd Volumetric The Volumetric Conditions menu allows the user to turn Conditions temperature pressure compensation on and off and to set the standard pressure and temperature values in various modes Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Volumetric Conditions Comite EE Baan nit Temperature The Temperature screen is used to turn the temperature correction to Compensation actual or standard e Press to toggle and set the temperature compensation to actual or standard Standard Temperature The Standard Temperature screen is used to set the standard temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Volumetric Conditions gt Temperature gt Standard Pressure Compensation The Pressure Compensation screen is used to turn the pressure correction to actual or standard e Press to toggle and set the pressure compensa
143. e 0 0 0 1 0 7 0 0 0 Not Used 0 0 1 10 o 7 0 0 0 Not Used 0 1 0 0 o 7 0 0 0 Not Used 1 10 0 0 0 f0 o J0 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual See Table D 1 for operating status and Table D 2 for error status for the Model 5014 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 5014 D 7 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands Table D 2 Error Status for Model 5014 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 ys 2 IL gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Error status Filter Counter 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J1 Filter Change 0 0 o 0 0 10 1 10 Beta Detector Alarm 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Not Used 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Detector Board Status Alarm 0 0 0 l1 0 0 0 0 Motherboard Status Alarm 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 0 Flow Alarm 0 J1 0 0 o 10 0 0 Not Used 1 10 0 0 o 10 0 0 D 8 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix E ESM Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the ESM Protocol commands from the prior FH62 platform that can be used to remotely control a Model 5014 instrument using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger ESM protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or over Ethernet ESM functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP port 9884 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet ESM Commands Tabie E 1 through E 3 lists the ESM commands supp
144. e and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 60 C If the flow temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Flow Temp Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Alarms Menu CHA Pit Pula pid Min and Max Flow The Minimum Flow Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the Temperature Limits minimum flow temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum flow temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Flow Temp gt Min or Max Board Temperature The Board Temperature screen displays the current board temperature value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 60 C If the board temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Board Temp Min and Max Board The Minimum Board Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the Temperature Limits minimum board temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum board temperature screens function the same way 3 66 Model 50
145. e conditions and mass sensor data The status bar displays the time 24 hour format the password lock icon service wrench icon alarm bell icon and optional zero span sample solenoid valve status if installed Status Bar Icons The password lock icon indicates that no parameter changes can be made from gt B A The alarm bell ion indicates the front panel that an alarm is active The service wrench icon indicates that the instrument is in the service mode 3 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview The Run screen normally displays the current particulate matter PM concentrations but also has additional Run screens for ambient conditions sample conditions and mass sensor data Pressing t Jand will scroll through the different Run screens Status Bar CONCENTEATI0H Concentration lt Mass Units Status Bar E a A J5 lt Status Bar Icons Ambient Conditions Run The Ambient Conditions Run screen displays the real time volumetric flow Screen rate at the inlet the ambient temperature the barometric pressure and the ambient relative humidity Status Bar Status Bar Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation Firmware Overview Sample Conditions Run The Ambient Conditions Run screen displays the sample filter Screen temperature the sample filter rela
146. e end of the interval Note This feature is found in all Series instruments but it is recommended that the data type be set to ONLY the current value cur as the datalogging averaging is done in addition to the normal concentration averaging A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Data Treatment DH vided ML a EA Flag Status Data The Flag Status Data screen is used to set the flag status data to either ON or OFF for the selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Flag Status Data Communication The Communication Settings menu is used for communications control Settings and configuration 3 30 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings ERED CH Pi Tit op popin pri HEH PPP L Piy bed PIRRO PLP i Serial Settings The Serial Setting submenu is used for serial communications control and configuration e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available The analyzer s default baud rate is set to 9600 to provide bac
147. e following example sets the heater to temp threshold Send set ht control temp Receive set ht control temp ok mass limit This command reports the current filter mass limit The following example reports that the mass limit is 1 500 mg Send mass limit Receive mass limit 1500 set mass limit value This command sets the filter mass limit to value where value is a floating point number representation of mass limit between 0 5 to 5 0 mg or 500 to 5 000 ug The following example sets the mass limit to 1 0 mg Send set mass limit 1 0 Receive set mass limit 1 0 ok pres comp This command reports whether pressure compensation is for actual or standard conditions The following example shows the pressure compensation is standard Send pres comp Receive pres comp std set pres comp selection selection act std These commands turn the pressure compensation to either actual or standard conditions The following example turns the pressure compensation to actual Send set pres comp act Receive set pres comp act ok pres std This command reports the standard pressure The following example reports that the standard pressure is 760 mmHg Send pres std Receive pres std 760 mmHg B 38 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration set pres std value This command sets the standard pressure to value where value is a floating point number represe
148. ear panel The motherboard sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include External connectors include e External Accessory e RS 232 485 Communications two connectors e Ethernet Communications e I O connector with Power Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Internal connectors include e Function Key Panel and Display e Measurement Interface Board e I O Expansion Board e Digital Output Board e AC Distribution Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 8 5 System Description Electronics Measurement Interface Board Measurement Interface Board Connectors Flow Sensor System Pressure Sensor Assembly Detector Amplifier Assembly 8 6 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboar
149. eater tube The Installation chapter covers detailed installation instructions After proper installation it is recommended to check the weather proof installation at all interfaces exposed to ambient conditions Ensure that the condition of the roof flange and silicone caulking will prevent any precipitation from entering the shelter and possibly damaging the instrument s electronics Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filter Figure 5 4 1 Remove the fan guard from the fan and remove the filter 2 Flush the filter with warm water and let dry a clean oil free purge will help the drying process or blow the filter clean with compressed air 3 Re install the filter and fan guard Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A FAN CABLE INSERTED THIS WAY EXTERIOR SIDE OF REAR PANEL REFER TO STICKER AIRFLOW FOR POSITIONING OF FAN Mounting Screws 4 7 Filter AN Fan Guard Figure 5 4 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Pump Rebuilding Rebuild the sample pump once every 12 18 months or as necessary depending on the environment is is used in The pump rep
150. ect the output signal that will be assigned to each analog channel The Concentrations screen is shown below See Table 3 5 for a list of items for each signal group choice In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Choose Signal to Output rb pikari ML Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu a oe i Ph dm prepr el PA a Ea be d PERRO Pihet Tini i Table 3 5 Signal Type Group Choices Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs None None None PM Barometer Pressure Analog Input 1 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed AVG PM Vacuum Analog Input 2 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Flow Pressure Analog Input 3 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Ambient RH Analog Input 4 if the I O expansion board is installed Sample RH Analog Input 5 if the I O expansion board is installed Ambient Temp Analog Input 6 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Board Temp Analog Input 7 if the I O expansion board is installed Flow Temp Analog Input 8 if the I O expansion board is installed Flow Vol Beta Beta Raw Alpha Raw Mass Beta Zero External Alarms Beta Ref Common Flags Det A Flags Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 47 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Input Configuration The Analog Input Co
151. ed Concentration units of micrograms per cubic meter ug m and milligrams per cubic meter mg m are available When switching the selected units the instrument s analog ranges all default to the highest range For example when switching from mg m to ug m the ranges default to 10000 g m Therefore whenever you change units you should also check the range settings Note If the units change the instrument should be re calibrated A display warning will appear A e In the Main Menu choose Range gt Conc Units ni rip Calor pe Bae EEE Range The Range screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs For example a PM range of 0 100 g m sets the analog output to concentrations between 0 and 100 g m by default The display shows the current PM range The next line of the display is used to change the range Table 3 2 lists the standard ranges e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Range 3 10 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu Table 3 2 Standard Ranges mg m pg m 0 1 100 1 0 1000 2 0 2000 3 0 3000 5 0 5000 10 00 10000 C1 C1 C2 C2 C3 C3 C1 C2 and C3 are custom ranges For more information about custom ranges see Set Custom Ranges below The analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 4 See Table 3 3 for channels and pin connection
152. ed record field The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed For Common Flags and Detector A Flags see Figure 35 and Figure 3 6 for data descriptions Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Other Measurements Ppl Figure 3 5 Common Flags 3 26 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Inputs Operation Instrument Controls Menu i IL Figure 3 6 Detector A Flags The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the parameter none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Analog Inputs Wi mid Pin Piri i Model 50147 Beta I
153. ed to the minimum content of date time PM concentration and error flags the analyzer can store data once each minute for 4 months gt 190 000 total records The Datalogging Settings menu allows the user flexibility in how data is stored and recorded Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Srec Lrec The Select Srec Lrec screen is used to select the log record type for other operations in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Srec Lrec DH Guided PLP View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the starting point to view the logged data by the number of records or by date and time Note that both types of records cannot be viewed at the same time only the selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt View Logged Data 3 22 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the number of records to view ending with the most recent It also shows the total number of records that have been logged for the selected record type ERE VET Pity EUs EEE TE oa nr Bat ade EE Fanad The Record Display screen read only displays the selected
154. een normally displays the current PM concentrations but also has additional Run screens for ambient conditions samble conditions and mass sensor data Press and to scroll through the different Run screens Cm Menu The Cm is used to display the Main Menu when in the Run screen or back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The 2 is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press 2 for a brief explanation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easilv distinguish them from the operating screens Press gt to return to the Run screen or any other key to exit a help screen Ce Cs J up Down The four arrow pushbuttons 4 LOs Ce Jan Ce gt Left Right gt move the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions The soft keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function The function of the soft keys is to provide a shortcut to the most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and user defined labels in the lower part of the display indicate the function of each key at that
155. eive set time 14 15 ok addr dns This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server Send addr dns Receive addr dns 192 168 1 1 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 43 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 44 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual set addr dns address This command sets the domain name server address where address consists gt of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr dns 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok addr gw This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address Send addr gw Receive addr gw 192 168 1 1 set addr gw address This command sets the default gateway address where address consists of 9 four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr gw 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr gw 192 168 1 1 ok addr ip This command reports the IP address of the analyzer Send addr ip Receive addr ip 192 168 1 200 set addr ip address This command sets the analyzer s IP address where address consists of four 9 numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr ip 192 168 1 200 Receive set addr
156. embly 10661 1 00 Rear Flow RTD Assembly 106536 00 RH Temperature Assembly 106535 00 Heater Tube Assembly Three Feet 106037 00 Load Motor Assembly 106032 00 Tape Motor Assembly 106470 00 Proportional Valve Assembly 106946 00 Pressure Board Assembly w tubing assembly 425454008 Preamp Board 106923 00 Pressure Valves 106540 00 Extension tubes w fitting 101055 00 AC Receptacle Assembly 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24 VDC with base plate and screws 101688 00 Ambient Temperature Thermistor with connector 100907 00 Fan 24 VDC 8630 Filter Guard Assembly with foam 109612 00 Fuse 250 VAC 10 0 Amp SlowBlow for 110 VAC and 115 VAC models 109613 00 Fuse 250 VAC 5 0 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240 VAC models Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Cable List Part Number Description 10 001403 External Pump Assembly 59 008630 Pump Rebuild Kit 24 000483 Pump Tubing External 3 8 inch 106994 00 Tubing Internal 3 8 inch 104401 00 106443 00 Tape Guides Filter Tape 108183 00 Tape Hardware Kit 112297 00 Replacement O ring Kit 106531 00 Cover Assembly 106988 00 Handles front cover FH125C14 Calibration Kit Cal Foils 10 000447 Modified Shoe for Tripod 106445 00 Metal Assembly Paste 107000 00 Fitting 5 8 Union w Nylon Ferrules 107001 00 Tubing 5 8 Stainless Steel 109583 00 Roof Flange Assemb
157. ens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Inst PM gt Min or Max The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode When the service mode is active the service wrench icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar To put the instrument into the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu RH T emperature The RH Temperature Calibration submenu allows the user to view and set Calibration the relative humidity and temperature sensor calibration The RH temperature calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt RH Temp Calibration Ambient Temperature The Ambient Temperature screen allows the user to view and calibrate ambient temperature Adjust the zero offset until the ambient temperature agrees with your treaceable standard e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt RH Temp Calibration gt Ambient Temp Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147
158. entration for the detector The following example reports that the radon concentration is 1 2 Bq m Send crn Receive crn 1 20 Bq m3 det status This command reports the current mass for the detector The sequence is Bc B a Each value is separated by a space Send det status Receive det status 30000 25000 500 diag volt det This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the detector board The voltage is positive 5 Send diag volt det Receive diag volt det 4 9 diag volt iob This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I O expansion board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt iob Receive diag volt iob 24 10 4 90 3 20 3 20 diag volt mb This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics Send diag volt mb Receive diag volt mb 24 10 14 90 4 90 3 20 3 20 diag volt mib This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 negative 15 positive 5 and positive 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt
159. enu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flow Pump Flow The Flow screen is used to view and adjust the flow e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flow Pump gt Flow Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Pump The Pump screen allows the user to toggle the pump to either ON or OFF e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flow Pump gt Pump Set Heater The Set Heater menu allows the user to set the status of the heater RH threshold and temperature threshold in various modes e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater DH vibe PLP Control The Control screen is used to set the status of the heater to either ON OFF RH threshold or TEMP threshold e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater gt Control 3 16 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Ea oe es Pa timc pH mith Marion nd Lii y Et or RH Threshold The RH Threshold screen is used to change the RH threshold value in percent The RH threshold is typically compatible with the gravimetric method being used for comparison e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater gt RH Threshold EPEE Ad baose PE OT Son Temperature Threshold The Temperature Threshold screen is used to change the temperature threshold value e Inthe
160. er assembly connector on the measurement interface board and disconnect the SHV connector from the detector amplifier 3 Remove the one screw holding the detector amplifier mounting bracket and slide out the detector amplifier assembly 7 12 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Amplifier Board Calibration Unhook SHV connector Unfasten screw and slide detector amplifier out Slide Out Unhook connector from Interface Board Figure 7 5 Replacing the Detector Amplifier Assembly 4 Install the new detector amplifier assembly by following the previous steps in reverse 5 Calibrate the detector amplifier board Refer to the Detector Amplifier Board Calibration procedure that follows Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 6 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Detector Amplifier Calibrate the detector amplifier after replacing the detector amplifier board Board Calibration Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A 1 Let the instrument sample zero air for about 90 minutes Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing External Pump Replacement External Pump Replacement 7 14 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 From the Main Menu choose S
161. erage PM concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Avg PM CH perm i mpini Pi AG ae Min and Max Average The Minimum Average PM Concentration alarm limit screen is used to PM Concentration Limits change the minimum average PM concentration alarm limit The minimum and maximum average PM concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Avg PM gt Min or Max Instant PM The Instant PM screen displays the current instant PM concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Service Menu Min and Max Instant PM Concentration Limits Service Menu 3 72 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual range from 10 to 10000 g m or 01 to 10 mg m If the instant PM concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Inst PM The Minimum Instant PM Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum instant PM concentration alarm limit The minimum and maximum instant PM concentration scre
162. ern Hessen ESM Protocol streaming data and NTP Network Time Protocol protocols Simultaneous connections from different locations over Ethernet Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications 2 User Defined Contact Closure Alarm Circuits 4 Averaged Analog Inputs 0 5 VDC with user defined conversion to engineering units Data Storage Maximum of 190 000 Concentration records with date time and flags Up to 32 types of logged data parameters increased parameters reduces number of records Power Requirements Model 50147 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Pump 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 4 25 A Maximum Power 805 Watts 115V 880 Watts 220 240V Physical Dimensions W 16 75 42 5 cm x D 23 58 4 cm x H 8 62 21 9 cm Weight 40 Ibs 19 kg Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 1 9 Chapter 2 Installation The following installation procedures for the Model 5014 describes packaging lifting the instrument unpacking the instrument setup and installation including the sample tube and pump and attaching the analog and or digital outputs to a recording device The installation should always be followed by instrument calibration as described in the Calibration chapter of this manual This chapter provides the following recommendations and procedures for installing the instrument e Packaging and Transport on page 2 1 e Lifting on page 2 2 e Unpacki
163. ers Supported 6 INST ALARMS DET ALARMS NOT USED 7 8 9 RH TEMP ALARMIS gt gt PRES VAC ALARMS FLOW ALARMS NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED EXT ALARM 1 EXT ALARM 2 gt gt gt gt gt gt N o a A w N EXT ALARM 3 IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the register number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the register number on the instrument A Note For additional information on how to read registers and interpret the data refer to the 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers section in this appendix A Table C 2 Read Registers for 5014i Register Number Variable 0 INVALID 1 amp 2 PMa 3 amp 4 NOT USED 5 amp 6 BARO PRES 7 amp 8 VACUUM 9 amp 10 NOT USED 1 amp 12 FLOW PRES 13 amp 14 NOT USED 158 16 AMB RH 178 18 SAMP RH 198 20 NOT USED Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 10 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Register Number Variable 21 amp 22 AMB TEMP 23 amp 24 BRD TEMP 25 amp 26 FLOW TEMP 27 amp 28 NOT USED 29 amp 30 NOT USED 31 amp 32 NOT USED 33 amp 34 FLOW VOL 35 amp 36
164. ervice gt Detector Calibration gt Auto The Auto Detector Calibration screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Detector Calibration screen press to start the auto detector calibration Use the following procedure to replace the pump Figure 7 6 Equipment Required Pump Adjustable wrench Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the pump power cable from the rear panel 3 Remove both lines from the pump 4 Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse 5 Perform a leak test as described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pressure Board Replacement Rear Panel AC PUMP To Rear Panel Bulkhead Vacuum Figure 7 6 Replacing the Pump Pressure Board Use the following procedure to replace the pressure board Figure 7 7 Replacement Equipment Required Pressure board Philips screwdriver 2 f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal compo
165. esented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems See Service Locations on page 6 22 for contact information In any correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Troubleshooting Guides on page 6 1 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 6 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 8 e Service Locations on page 6 22 Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 1 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem Table 6 2 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfunction No power Possible Cause Main fuses are blown are missing Digital electronics defective Actio
166. essesteseeseesestesteseeseeseeeeteseeseesee 2 6 Table 2 2 O Terminal Board Pin Descripti0NS ooonciincinincnnnnncninncnnosoo 2 17 Table 2 3 Default Analog OUtpUtS o oo cececescstesestesesteseeteseeeseeneees 2 18 Table 2 4 D O Terminal Board Pin DescriptiONS onoocnincinncoco 2 19 Table 2 5 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin DescriptiONS ooooocioininonnnncnncncninnnno 2 20 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons ooooococnicccicicniccccnnicocoonnnononnonocnococnonoss 3 3 Table 3 2 Standard AN ctas 3 11 Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs ccmoconocononcnncnoncononcononancnonannss 3 12 Table 3 4 Analog Output Zero to Full SCale oooonicocinicinininninnicccono 3 45 Table 3 5 Signal Type Group ChOICES ooooncoicciniocininocnconncononocnnncnonocnnnooo 3 47 Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide o ooococoicincinincininnininnininncnnooso 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages ocococociciciccnoinnncnocnrncncnncnrnnnooos 6 4 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descripti0NS o cnoo inio 6 8 Table 6 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 13 Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram o c onio 6 17 Table 6 6 O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions 6 19 Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 20
167. ettings Verify cable connections Replace detector Beta counts trending towards zero Verify alarm settings are between 5000 minimum and 20000 maximum RH Temperature Alarms Ambient RH Disconnect cable external on rear panel Disconnect cable internal Verify cable connection Verify cable connection RH Temperature Alarms Sample RH Disconnected heater Verify cable connection Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarm Message Possible Cause Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action RH Temperature Alarms Ambient Temp Disconnect cable external on rear panel Disconnect cable internal Verify cable connection Verify cable connection RH Temperature Alarms Flow Temp Disconnected cable Sensor defective Verify connection to measurement interface board Replace sensor RH Temperature Alarms Board Temp Disconnected cable Sensor defective Verify connection to measurement interface board Replace sensor Pressure Vacuum Alarms Barometer Pressure Disconnected cable Verify cable connections Replace board Pressure Vacuum Alarms Vacuum Disconnected plumbing Disconnected cable Sensor defective Verify plumbing connections Verify cable connection Replace pressure board Pressure Vacuum Alarms Flow Disconnected plumbing Disconnected cable Sensor defective
168. ferent logic then the response would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte LSB being relay no 1 A For example Receive relay stat 0x0001 indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic all others are normally closed Receive relay stat 0x0005 indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic all others are normally closed set relay open set relay open value set relay closed set relay closed value These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay number value where value is the relay between 1 and 16 The following example sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed A Send set relay open 1 Receive set relay open 1 ok The erec lrec and srec layouts contain the following e A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses e A format specifier for parsing binary responses In addition to these the erec layout contains e A format specifier for producing the front panel display screens Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 55 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for ASCII Responses Format Specifier for Binary Responses B 56 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Values are read using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations
169. ffff din channel This command reports the action assigned to the digital input channel and the index number of the corresponding active state The following example reports input 1 to be assigned an index number 3 corresponding to action of PM mode with the active state being high Send din 1 Receive din 1 3 PM MODE high set din channel index state This command assigns digital input channel 1 16 to activate the action indicated by index 1 12 when the input transitions to the designated state high or low Use the list var din command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding actions The following example sets the digital input channel 1 to 3 on a low to high transition Send set din 1 3 high Receive set din 1 3 high ok dout channel This command reports the index number output variable and the active state assigned to digital output channel The following example reports output 4 to be assigned an index number 11 corresponding to action of flowl alarms Send dout 4 Receive dout 4 11 FLOW ALARMS open Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific set dout channel index state C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action associated with index and assigns it an active state of state open or closed Use the list var dout command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding s
170. for digital outputs is open or closed The active state for digital inputs is high or low Send list dout Receive list dout output index variable state 1 5 CONC ALARM open 2 1 LOCAL REMOTE open 3 3 UNITS open list var aout list var dout list var din list var log These commands report the list of possible index numbers and the variables associated with that index number available for selection in the current mode for analog outputs digital outputs digital inputs and datalogging The index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using set sp field index The following example reports the list of analog outputs index numbers and variables Send list var aout Receive list var aout index variable O none 1 pm 3 baro 4 vac 6 pflow 8 ambrt 9 srh 1 ambtemp 12 brdtemp 13 ftemp 15 stemp 17 frol 19 beta 28 braw 29 araw 30 avgpm 32 mass 34 bzero 45 extg 50 bref 52 cflg 53 aflg Thermo Fisher Scientific Record Layout Thermo Fisher Scientific Definition C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition relay stat This command reports the current relay logic as normally open or normally closed if all the relays are set to same state that is all open or all closed The following example shows that the status of all the relays logic is set to normally open Send relay stat Receive relay stat open Note If individual relays have been assigned dif
171. g set using a DHCP server Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port Up to three simultaneous connections are allowed per protocol The external accessory connector is not used in the Model 5014 analyzer This port is used in other models to communicate with smart external devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an RS 485 electrical interface Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 8 11 Inlet Assemblies Sampling Tube Extensions I O Expansion Board Assembly 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 9 Optional Equipment The Model 50147 is available with the following options e Inlet Assemblies on page 9 1 e Sampling Tube Extensions on page 9 1 e I O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9 1 e 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly on page 9 1 e Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 2 e Cables on page 9 2 e Mounting Options on page 9 3 e Roof Flange Assembly on page 9 8 The Model 5014 can be used for different applications Using different inlet configurations PMio PM2 s PM Inlets several particle size fractions can be monitored The main application is the measurement of PMio and PM for ambient air quality monitoring and health effect studies Often the most compatible way to install the Model 50147 at air quality monitoring sites is to collocate the inlet at the same he
172. g and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 mmHg to 250 mmHg If the vacuum reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Vacuum The Minimum Vacuum alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum vacuum alarm limit The minimum and maximum vacuum screens function the same way Note The maximum vacuum value should not be changes as this is also used as a protective feature for the instrument A e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Vacuum gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu i mri Flow The Flow screen displays the current flow reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 mmHg to 40 mmHg If the flow reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Flow Min and Max Flow Limits The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum flow alarm limit The minimum and maximum flow screens function the same way e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Flow gt Min or Max
173. g example reports that the flow span is 1 2 Send flow pres span Receive flow pres span 1 200 set flow pres span value This command sets the flow pressure span to value where value is a floating point representation of the pressure span specified at the time of calibration The following example successfully sets the new value for flow pressure to 1 5 Send set flow pres span 1 5 Receive set flow pres span 1 5 ok flow pres zero This command reports the flow pressure zero for the detector at the time of calibration The following example reports that the flow pressure zero is 3 0 Send flow pres zero Receive flow pres zero 3 0 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 31 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 32 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual flow span This command reports the current flow span at the time of calibration The following example reports that the flow at calibration is 1 00 Send flow span Receive flow span 1 000 set flow span value This command sets the current flow span to the value where value is a floating point representation of the flow span specified at the time of calibration The following example sets the flow span to 1 5 Send set flow span 1 5 Receive set flow span 1 5 ok flow temp offset This command reports offset for flow temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the flow temperature offset is 5 C Send flow temp offset Receive flow temp offset 5
174. g voltage output range per channel B 51 avg24 time Reports sets 24 hour averaging time to start averaging the B 9 concentration baro mass coef Reports sets the current barometric mass coefficient B 29 baro pres Reports the current barometric pressure B 18 baro span Reports sets the current barometric pressure span B 29 baud Reports sets current baud rate B 46 beta th Reports sets the current reference beta threshold for the B 29 detector bkg pm Reports sets current PM background B 30 board temp Reports the current board temperature B 18 cal baro pres span Automatically calculates the span coefficient B 30 cal flow pres span Automatically sets the flow pressure span B 30 cal flow span Automatically sets the flow span B 30 cal vac flow zero Automatically triggers the filter change and sets vacuum and B 31 flow zero cal vac pres span Automatically sets the vacuum pressure span B 30 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 5 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Command Description Page clr lrecs Clears away only Irecs that have been saved B 20 clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B 20 clr srecs Clears away only srecs that have been saved B 20 coef pm Reports sets current PM coefficient B 31 conc unit Reports sets current concentration units B 35 contrast Reports sets current screen contrast B 41 copy
175. ge 20 minutes Long Term Averaging 60 to 3 600 sec and 24 hour Data Output Rate every 1 second Operating Range The temperature of the sampled air may vary between 30 and 50 C The 50147 units must be weather protected within the range of 4 C to 50 C An optional Complete Outdoor Enclosure provides complete weather protection Non condensing lt 95 RH inside 50147 Sample Flow Volumetric flow control system uses a calibrated subsonic precision orifice and the measured ambient temperature and pressure to maintain constant volumetric flow rates Nominal Flow Rate 16 67 L min Flow Precision 2 of measured value Flow Accuracy lt 5 of measured value Data Storage Internal data logging of user specified variables capacity of 190 000 records Filter Media Sample Filter Glass fiber filter type width 40 mm length 17 m Whatman Inc Inlet Accessories TSP European or U S EPA PM10 Inlets European or U S EPA PM2 5 Inlet Configurations PMIZ 5 VSSC PM1 0 SCC Tripod Data Output and Input iPort software to view and change system operation from PC Outputs Selectable Voltage RS232 RS485 TCP IP 10 Status Relays and Power Fail Indication standard 0 20 or 4 20 mA Isolated Current Output optional Inputs 16 Digital Inputs standard Eight 0 to 10 VDC Analog Inputs optional 8 User Defined Analog Outputs 0 1 or 0 5 VDC Protocols C Link MODBUS Geystitech Bay
176. gisters Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Register Value Hi 10 Register Value Lo 10 Register Value Hi 11 Register Value Lo 11 Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 0x02 0x2B 0x00 0x00 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Thermo Fisher Scientific Single Coil MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register Value Hi 12 0x00 Register Value Lo 12 0x64 Register Value Hi 13 0x00 Register Value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of registers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The Force Write Single Coil function simulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The requested ON OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data field A value of OxFFOO requests the action to be ON A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written Note This function will not work if the instrument is in service mode A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0
177. h Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT A 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Identification Thermo Fisher Scientific
178. he Auto Flow Calibration Place a NIST traceable volumetric flow meter on top of the instrument after complete installation reassembled heater tube sample tubes and inlets Allow approximately 1 minute for the flow to stabilize Once stable measure and average three individual readings from the reference This average observed flow rate from your reference meter should now be entered in the screen below PO E ey yes EN 4 METERA Lid CH ninii Rri Taic bm iii Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more Repeat as necessary to within 2 Perform the Leak Test procedure on page 5 6 to verify no leaks The Model 5014 Beta is calibrated for mass in the factory using a series of null and span foils The mass transfer standard foil sets are available from Thermo Fisher Scientific and should be used as part of a QA Program for performing a QC check on the mass measurements This mass foil calibration procedure can be used for QC checks auditing and calibration Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibration Calibration Procedure 4 8 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual The Mass Calibration submenu is used to view and set the mass calibration point The mass calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service tech
179. he Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Sample RH ip priori Piet Min and Max Sample RH The Minimum Sample RH alarm limit screen is used to change the Limits minimum ambient RH alarm limit The minimum and maximum sample RH screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Sample RH gt Min or Max 3 64 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Ambient Temperature Min and Max Ambient Temperature Limits Flow Temperature Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu The Ambient Temperature screen displays the current ambient temperature value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 30 C to 60 C If the ambient temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Ambient Temp ERE CH MP Tit WH mid PS PHP ELSES Pi AG Lf bP The Minimum Ambient Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum ambient temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum ambient temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Ambient Temp gt Min or Max The Flow Temperature screen displays the current ambient temperature valu
180. ic material from the case exterior 8 Remove the external pump from its shipping container and place next to the instrument The Model 50147 has been bench tested and calibrated at the factory prior to shipping The mass sensors RH sensor internal sample temperature sensor flowmeter temperature sensor external ambient temperature sensor barometric pressure and volumetric flow rate have been calibrated to traceable standards For a quick start proceed immediately to the Startup procedures and skip the Bench Acceptance Test To assure the best quality data it is recommended that you perform an acceptance test Furthermore as part of a quality assurance program acceptance testing will be conducted prior to field installation This is an excellent opportunity to compare the monitor to the primary and transfer standards that are being used within the monitoring program Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 3 Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Acceptance Test 2 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Furthermore it is an opportunity to assure that the monitor is operating according to the manufacturer specifications After acceptance testing a completed monitoring installation will require final volumetric flow rate verification Prior to installing the Model 5014z you should perform the acceptance testing procedures These tests are conducted to evaluate the out of box performance of the instr
181. ientific Operation Alarms Menu RH Temperature The RH Temperature Alarms submenu allows the user to view and set the P Alarms relative humidity or temperature alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms Ambient RH The Ambient RH screen displays the current ambient relative humidity value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 95 If the ambient RH reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Ambient RH ENORME WH rnd tu Min and Max Ambient RH The Minimum Ambient RH alarm limit screen is used to change the Limits minimum ambient RH alarm limit The minimum and maximum ambient RH screens function the same way Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Ambient RH gt Min or Max Sample RH The Sample RH screen displays the current sample relative humidity value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 95 If the sample RH reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Int
182. ight as other similar use inlets The Installation chapter discusses specific siting criteria In addition to using the optional inlets extending the sample downtube length is necessary using a rigid sample tube The 1 O expansion board provides six analog current output channels 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA and eight analog voltage inputs 0 10 V The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs The 25 pin terminal board assembly is included with the optional I O expansion board Refer to Terminal Board PCB Assemblies in the Installation chapter for information on attaching the cable to the Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 9 1 Optional Equipment Terminal Block and Cable Kits Terminal Block and Cable Kits Cables 9 2 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual connector board For associated part numbers refer to the Servicing chapter The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available One kit is for the DB37 connectors and can be used for either the analog output connector or the relay output connector The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I O expansion board For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Compone
183. in FLASH memory It is important that this command be sent each time instrument parameters are changed If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure Table B 2 lists the 50147 C Link protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description Page 1 Simulates pressing soft key 1 pushbutton B 34 2 Simulates pressing soft key 2 pushbutton B 34 3 Simulates pressing soft key 3 pushbutton B 34 4 Simulates pressing soft key 4 pushbutton B 34 addr dns Reports sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B 43 addr gw Reports sets default gateway address for Ethernet port B 44 addr ip Reports sets IP address for Ethernet port B 44 addr nm Reports sets netmask address for Ethernet port B 44 addr ntp Reports sets IP address for network time protocol server B 45 alarm alpha count Reports sets alpha count alarm maximum value B 11 max alarm alpha count Reports sets alpha count alarm minimum value B 11 min Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 3 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Command Description Page alarm amb rh max Reports sets ambient relative humidity alarm maximum value B 11 alarm amb rh min Reports sets ambient relative humidity alarm minimum value B 11 alarm amb temp Repo
184. in the plug pump regulation input Clean inside parts of pump change Clean air passage Close valves Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 4 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages Alarm Message Instrument Alarms Filter Tape Counter Possible Cause Loose reel nuts Broken tape Loose photo interrupt cable Action Tighten reel nuts Replace tape Verify connections Instrument Alarms Filter Tape Change Loose reel nuts Broken tape Tape motor nut turning Tighten reel nuts Replace tape Verify connection to measurement interface board Replace tape motor Instrument Alarms Bench Cam working not functioning Motor turning cam not Verify connector to measurement interface board Replace motor Verify setscrews on cam coupling Instrument Alarms Motherboard Status Instrument Alarms Interface Status Instrument Alarms 1 0 Exp Status Internal cables not connected properly Board defective Check that all internal cables are connected properly Re cycle AC power to instrument If still alarming change board Replace board Detector Alarms Alpha Detector Settings Re calibrate detector Verify alarm settings are between 0 minimum and 100 maximum Detector Alarms Beta Disconnected cable Defective detector S
185. ing of an item and its minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press Ce If the readings go beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu If any alarms are active the alarm bell icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms 3 60 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Instrument Alarms The Instrument Alarms submenu allows the user to view a set of alarms for different boards The filter tape change heater power and bench items motherboard interface board and I O expansion board are read only The motherboard status interface board status and I O expansion board status if installed indicate that the power supplies are working and connections are successful There are no setting screens for these alarms e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Instrument Alarms Filter Tape Counter The Filter Tape Counter screen displays the current filter tape counter value and sets the maximum alarm limit If the filter tape counter reading goes beyond the maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Instrument Alarms gt Filter Tape Counter Max Filter Tape Counter The Maximum Filter Tape Counter s
186. ip 192 168 1 200 ok addr nm This command reports the IP netmask Send addr nm Receive addr nm 255 255 252 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration set addr nm mask This command sets the netmask mask where mask consists of four numbers 9 ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr nm 255 255 252 0 Receive set addr nm 255 255 252 0 ok addr ntp This command reports the IP address for the network time protocol server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Send addr ntp Receive addr ntp 10 209 43 237 set addr ntp address This command sets the network time protocol server address where address 9 consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 Receive set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 ok allow mode cmd This command reports the current allow mode setting 1 allow set mode local and set mode remote commands 0 ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands according to Table B 7 The default value is 0 ignore the commands The following example shows that the instrument is configured to ignore set mode local or set mode remote
187. is organized into the following chapters and appendices to provide direct access to specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of product features describes the principle of operation and lists the specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack setup and startup the instrument Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display screens the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven firmware Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional
188. ither 0 local unlocked or 1 remote locked according to Table B 10 The default value is 0 power up in local unlocked mode The following example shows that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote locked mode Send power up mode Receive power up mode 1 set power up mode value This command is used to configure the instrument to power up in the local unlocked mode value 0 or the remote locked mode value 1 according to Table B 10 If the instrument is set to power up in the local remote mode the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to power up in the remote locked mode changes can not be made from the Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 49 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Configuration B 50 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual front panel The following example sets the instrument to power up in remote locked mode Send set power up mode 1 Receive set power up mode 1 ok Table B 10 Power Up Mode Values Value Power up Mode 0 Local Unlocked Mode default 1 Remote Locked Mode program no This command reports the analyzer s model information and program version number Send program no Receive program no iSeries 50141 00 05 37 093 tz This command reports the tz timezone string for the NTP server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Operation chapter for
189. ition panel 6 Remove two screws from the left side rear of the case viewed from the front 7 Remove one screw from the bottom rear of the case 8 Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel 9 While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement case assembly and pull the measurement case assembly from the rear of the case 10 Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel that secures the top of the panel to the measurement case assembly and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables 11 Replace the measurement case assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Fuse Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the fuse Equipment Required Replacement fuses refer to the Replacement Parts List in this chapter 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the fuse drawer located on the AC power connector 7 10 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Fan Filter Replacement 3 If either fuse is blown replace both fuses 4 Insert fuse drawer and re connect power cord Fan Filter Use the following procedure to replace the fan and the fan filter Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Fan Fan filter Philips screwdriver Cable cutter for tie wrap removal f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of st
190. ity threshold for the B 40 detector ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton B 34 ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton B 34 Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurements C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Command Description Page sample rh Reports the sample relative humidity B 20 save Stores parameters in FLASH B 43 save params Stores parameters in FLASH B 43 sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response B 35 Use iscreen instead sp field Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list B 26 sr Reports the last srec stored B 23 srec Reports maximum number of srecs B 22 srec format Reports sets output format for srecs ASCII or binary B 24 srec layout Reports current layout of srec data B 24 srec mem size Reports maximum number of srecs that can be stored B 24 srec per Reports sets srec logging period B 25 stream per Reports sets current time interval for streaming data B 26 stream time Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B 27 tape counter Reports the number of counts corresponding to the filter tape B 20 movement temp comp Reports sets temperature compensation to actual or standard B 40 temp std Reports sets the standard temperature B 40 temp th Reports sets the temperature threshold for the detector B 40 thermal mass coef Reports sets the current thermal mass coefficient B 33 time Reports sets current time 24 hour f
191. kwards compatibility with the older C series analyzers e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Baud Rate prak pruni PELIR Ep O OEH piba PA Py AG ee Pii E E Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Data Bits The Data Bits screen is used to set the number of serial data bits to either 7 or 8 default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Data Bits DH Guided PLP Parity The Parity screen is used to select the parity bit for the serial port to None default Even or Odd e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Parity Stop Bits The Stop Bits screen is used to set the number of stop bits for the serial port to 1 default or 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Stop Bits ty y AN ir i a A ML 3 32 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu RS 232 RS 485 Selection The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to an
192. l 1 6 Alarms Alarms Detected Instrument Alarms Filter Tape Counter Filter Tape Change Bench Heater Power Motherboard Status Interface Status I O EXP Status Detector Alarms Alpha Beta RH Temperature Alarms Ambient RH Sample RH Ambient Temp Flow temp Board Temp Service Password RH Temp Calibration Set Password Ambient Temp Lock Password Flow Temp Change Password Ambient RH Remove Password Pres Vacuum Calibration Unlock Password Baro Pres Vac Flow Flow Calibration Auto Manual Mass Calibration Thermal Coefficient Vacuum Coefficient Baro Coefficient Mass Coefficient Alpha Eff Coefficient Detector Calibration Auto Pressure Vacuum Alarms Manual Baro Press Vacuum Flow Flow Alarms Conc Alarms Avg PM Inst PM Instrument Configuration I O Expansion Board Detector Detector B Contact Info Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware Analog Out Calibration Voltage Channel 1 6 Current Channel 1 6 Analog Input Calibration Input Channel 1 8 Display Pixel test Restore User Defaults Restore Factory Defaults Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 5 Operation Firmware Overview Power Up Screen The Power Up screen is displayed when power is applied to the Model 5014 This screen is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are being performed Thermo LEN TI vies Run Screens The Run screens display the PM concentration ambient conditions sampl
193. l Scale procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by applying a known voltage to the channels Equipment Required DC voltage source greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts 1 Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 9 shows the analog input pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press Y to scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press e 4 Press to scroll to Calibrate Full scale and press e The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel Thermo Fisher Scientific Themistor Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Themistor Replacement 5 Use e Jand J to enter the source voltage and press _ to calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel connected to the source voltage 6 Press gt to return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 3 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Use the following procedure to replace the optional ambient temperature thermistor Figure 7 10 Equipment Required Thermistor assembly Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A pro
194. l set a high voltage and thresholds for alpha and beta reference counts e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Auto CH Citra Manual Detector The Mass Coefficient submenu allows the user to perform a mass foil Calibration calibration using a zero null and span foil set e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual Pra WH mid Us cee beos Beta Ref Alpha Counts The Beta Ref Alpha Counts screen allows the user to view the real time alpha and beta counts e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual gt Beta Ref Alpha Counts Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 83 Operation Service Menu E Pri High Voltage The High Voltage screen allows the user to view and set the high voltage value e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual gt High Voltage a ip gies fot Pii fiini i Beta Ref Threshold The Beta Ref Threshold screen allows the user to view and set the detector operating voltage manually e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual gt Beta Ref Threshold ep gies Ce a E SO a EA Alpha Threshold The Alpha Threshold screen allows the user to view and set the alpha threshold manually e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual gt Alpha Threshold 3 84 Model 50147 Beta I
195. l the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale 7 22 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual 2 At the Analog Input Cal screen press to scroll to a channel and press 3 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press e The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 4 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to zero volts The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting 5 Press Cm gt Cm to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary 6 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Ful
196. lange Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 9 9 Instrument Preparation Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 10 Model 5014 to 5030 Upgrade Procedures This chapter describes the 50147 to 50307 upgrade procedures For details see the following topics Instrument Preparation on page 10 1 SHARP Connection Bracket Assembly Installation on page 10 2 Radius Tube Adapter Installation on page 10 5 SHARP External Valve Installation on page 10 7 SHARP Optics Assembly Installation on page 10 9 Upgrade of the Heater Tube Assembly on page 10 10 Model Label Change on page 10 11 Power On Instrument on page 10 11 Use the following procedure to prepare the instrument If upgrading at an installed site take the appropriate measures to secure the sample downtube and remove the instrument heater assembly and set aside From Instrument Panel select Main Menu select Instrument Controls and then Service Mode Toggle to Service Mode On From Instrument Panel select Filter Tape and then Manual and select the BENCH to open Erom Instrument Panel select Diagnostics Instrument Configuration and change the DETECTOR configuration from BETA to SHARP Turn instrument power off with the measurement head in the open position Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 10 1 Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures Instrument Preparation 6 Unplug instrument from A
197. ll become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for whic
198. lowed in the query string A command with no address is also a valid command The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 14 lt STX gt DA lt CR gt lt STX gt DA014 lt CR gt lt STX gt DA lt SP gt lt 14 lt ETX gt lt BCC gt lt STX gt DA lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with lt STX gt which is followed by the characters DA and the lt address gt if present matches the Instrument Address and the command is terminated with either lt CR gt with no checksum or lt ETX gt followed by the correct checksum lt BCC gt D 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command DA In response to a valid data query command the instrument responds in the following format lt STX gt MD09 lt SP gt lt address gt lt SP gt lt measured valuel gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt SP gt lt address 1 gt lt SP gt lt measured value2 gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command i e if the received command was terminated with a lt CR gt then the response is terminated with lt CR gt and if the command was terminated with a
199. lt ETX gt lt BCCs then the response is terminated with lt ETX gt and the computed checksum lt BCC gt The 09 after the MD indicates that nine measurements are present in the reply string 10 for ten measurements and so on This will also determine the length of the reply string lt address gt is the Instrument Address Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the lt address X gt where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included lt measured value gt is the concentration value in currently selected gas units represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2 characters exponent each with sign Mantissa sign and 4 digits The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is not transmitted Exponent sign and 2 digits Example 5384000 0 is represented as 5384 06 0 04567 is represented as 4567 02 lt status gt is formed by lt operating status gt and lt error status gt and separated by a space i e lt operating status gt lt SP gt lt error status gt Each of the two lt operating status gt and lt error status gt are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte 8 Bits operation status and one byte 8 Bits error status These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Ta
200. ly Expendable item not covered by warranty Cable List Table 7 2 lists the Model 5014 cables See the Troubleshooting chapter for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin descriptions Table 7 2 Model 50147 Cables Part Number 101349 00 Description AC Power Cable 115 VAC US AC Power Cable 220 VAC EU DC Power Supply 24 V Output 115 VAC Supply to Measurement Interface Board RS 485 Data AC Power Switch to Motherboard DC Power Supply Status Monitor Motherboard to Front Panel Board DC Power Supply AC Input Main AC from Receptacle Assembly gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt o o o o o o o o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt AC to Power Switch 7 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Part Number Servicing External Device Connection Components Description 101267 00 Fan Power Assembly 106028 00 RH Temperature Connector Assembly 106030 00 Heater Cable to Heater Assembly 106029 00 Pump Cable to Pump Plug Assembly 106844 00 106027 00 Rear Solenoid Cable Assembly Pressure to Interrupt Board Cable Assembly 105952 00 Cam Photo Interrupt Cable Assembly 106189 00 Counter Wheel Photo Interrupt Cable Assembly 106400 00 External Device Connection Components instrument Part Number 102562 00 External RH Temperature Cable Assembly Table
201. m ib status Reports the interface board status B 16 alarm io status Reports the I O expansion board status B 16 alarm mb status Reports the motherboard status B 16 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page alarm sample rh Reports sets sample relative humidity alarm maximum value B 16 max alarm sample rh min Reports sets sample relative humidity alarm minimum value B 16 alarm status det Reports the detector status B 16 alarm tape counter Reports sets tape counter alarm maximum value B 17 max alarm vac pres max Reports sets vacuum pressure alarm maximum value B 17 alarm vac pres min Reports sets vacuum pressure alarm minimum value B 17 allow mode cmd Reports sets the current set allow mode command B 45 alpha eff Reports sets the current value of alpha efficiency for the B 27 detector alpha th Reports sets the current value of alpha threshold for the B 28 detector amb rh Reports the ambient relative humidity B 17 amb rh zero Reports sets the current ambient relative humidity zero B 28 amb temp Reports the current ambient temperature B 17 amb temp zero Reports sets the current ambient temperature zero B 28 analog out range Reports sets analog current output range per channel B 50 analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B 51 analog vout range Reports sets analo
202. m manometer If using a blue Druck manometer place blue manometer on bench b Turn on manometer and let manometer self calibrate Do not move manometer while self calibrating c Connect the side of the manometer to the Delta P K port on the rear panel d Open Delta P X toggle vales to open flow through the manometer e Cal Vac Pressure Span by entering the actual value from the reference manometer f Press to save value The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Equipment Required Multimeter Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be tested Figure 7 9 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs screen appears Press o scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear 3 P t ll to the desired channel ponding to th panel terminal pins where the meter is connected and press 4 The Set Analog Outputs screen appears 4 Press to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero 5 Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the
203. mand sets the concentration units to mg m or ug m The following example sets the concentration units to mg m Send set conc unit mg m3 Receive set conc unit mg m3 ok custom range range 1 2 3 This command reports the user defined value of custom range 1 2 or 3 The following example reports that custom range 1 is defined to 5 50 mg m Send custom 1 Receive custom 1 5 500E 00 mg m3 set custom range range value set custom 1 value set custom 2 value set custom 3 value These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the three custom ranges 1 2 or 3 to range value where value is a floating point number representing concentration in the currently selected units The following example sets the custom 1 range to 100 5 ug m Send set custom 1 100 5 ug m3 Receive set custom 1 100 5 g m3 ok filter period This command reports the number of hours to be added to filter next time for the filter tape change The following example reports that the filter period is eight hours Send filter period Receive filter period 8 HRS set filter period value This command sets the number of hours to be added to filter next time for the filter tape change to value where value is a floating point representation of the filter period in hours The following example sets the filter period to 10 hours Send set filter period 10 Receive set filter period 10 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scien
204. meter as a reference collocated next to the Humidity ambient RH temperature sensor assembly measure and compare three individual readings between both the reference and the 50141 response Taking an average of both sets of readings calculate the average difference between the two readings and record that as your offset This offset ZERO should now be entered in the screen below Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more If it appears that the temperature has shifted into the wrong direction change the sign of your offset value Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Calibration Procedure Flow Temperature Assuming the instrument cover has been removed the heater has been turned off and removed from the instrument and the instrument has been sampling room temperature air for 1 hour this calibration can now proceed Using a NIST traceable thermometer as a reference collocated next to the small sample tube inlet on top of the instrument measure and compare three individual readings between both the reference and the 50147 response Taking an average of both sets of readings calculate the average difference between the two readings and record that as your offset This offset ZERO should now be entered in the screen below Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more If it appears that the temperature has shifted into the wrong direction change the sign of yo
205. mib Receive diag volt mib 24 98 14 80 14 90 4 96 3 20 flow This command reports the current sample flow The following example reports that the sample flow is 16 69 LPM Send sample flow Receive sample flow 16 69 LPM flow pres This command reports the current flow pressure for the detector in mmHg The following example reports that the flow pressure is 24 1 mmHg Send flow pres Receive flow pres 24 1 mmHg flow temp This command reports the current flow temperature for the detector in degrees C The following example reports that the flow temperature is 22 3 C Send flow temp Receive flow temp 22 3 deg io bd This command reports the presence of the I O expansion board yes no The following example reports the I O expansion board is present yes Send io bd Receive io bd yes mass This command reports the presence of mass The following example reports that the mass is 0 1 mg m Send mass Receive mass 0 1 mg m3 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 19 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 20 Datalogging Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual set reset tape counter This command resets the tape count to zero Send set reset tape counter Receive set reset tape counter ok sample rh This command reports the sample RH in percent The following example reports that the sample RH is 20 Send sample rh Receive sample rh 20 0 tape counter This command reports the number count
206. mple reports that the vacuum pressure alarm minimum value is 20 0 mmHg Send alarm vac pres min Receive alarm vac pres min 20 0 mmHg set alarm vac pres min value set alarm vac pres max value These commands set the vacuum pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing vacuum pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The following example sets the vacuum pressure alarm maximum value to 250 0 mmHg Send set alarm vac pres max 250 0 Receive set alarm vac pres max 250 0 ok amb rh This command reports the ambient RH in percent The following example reports that the ambient RH is 30 Send amb rh Receive amb rh 30 0 amb temp This command reports the current ambient temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the ambient temperature is 15 C Send amb temp Receive amb temp 15 0 degC Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 17 C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics B 18 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual baro pres This command reports the current barometric pressure in mmHg The following example reports that the barometric pressure is 722 mmHg Send baro pres Receive baro pres 722 0 mmHg board temp This command reports the current board temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the board temperature is 15 C Send board temp Receive board temp 15 0 degC crn This command reports the current radon conc
207. must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect cable 3 Remove mounting screws 4 Remove board 5 Re install the photo interrupt board by following the previous steps in reverse Unfasten screws 2 Unhook Cable gt Figure 7 14 Replacing the Photo Interrupt Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Proportional Valve Replacement Proportional Valve Replacement 7 30 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the proportional valve Figure 7 15 Equipment Required Proportional valve assembly Hex driver 3 32 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below Disconnect connector from the measurement interface board Disconnect plumbing Remove four mounting screws and remove proportional valve assembly Replace the proportional valve assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Perform a leak test as described in
208. n Check voltages from power supply Check that all boards and connectors are seated properly Replace with spare boards to isolate the problem No automatic filter change Reel nuts not tight No more filter tape Filter not properly adhered or broken Filter tape transport drive motor defective Optical tape counter defective Tighten reel nuts Replace with new filter tape Adhere filter tape to take up reel and wind over itself once Replace motor Replace optical tape transport sensor Pressure sensor s board do not hold calibration Valves closed Loose plumbing Pressure board defective Verify AP valves on rear panel are in the closed position Verify all plumbing connections Replace pressure printed circuit board Highly variable concentration Recorder noise Sample concentration varying Foreign material in optical bench Digital electronics defective Replace or repair recorder and or leads Run Model 5014 on a zero filter if quiet there is no malfunction Clean optical bench Replace board with a spare board Instrument does not calibrate properly System leak Pressure or temperture out of calibration Digital electronics defective Flow Find and repair leak Re calibrate pressure or temperature Replace one board at a time with a spare board to isolate the defective board Verify AP valves on rear panel are in the closed positi
209. n ptr unpackDisplay void far tdib unsigned char far rlescreen ptr screen unsigned char far malloc 19200 RLE decode the screen for i 0 i lt 19200 amp amp ptr screen lt 19200 i ptr rlescreen i if rlescreen i 0 unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr 0 rlecount else if rlescreen 1 Oxff unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptrt Oxff rlecount To convert this data into a BMP for use with Windows it needs to be saved as a 4 bit per pixel gray scale image Also note that BMP files are upside down relative to this data that is the top display line is the last line in the BMP sc screen These commands are meant for backward compatibility with the C series Screen information is instead reported using the iscreen command above Send screen Receive screen This is an iSeries instrument Screen information not available conc unit This command reports the current concentration units mg m or ug m The following example reports that the concentration units are set to mg m Send Receive conc unit conc unit pg m3 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 35 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 36 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual set conc unit unit unit g m mg m This com
210. nds to stabilize the flow after connecting Record the Model 50147 Volumetric Flow Rate as Qm and the FTS flow rate as Qi assuring that both are being recorded in units of actual liters per minute Take three readings each from Qm and Qi and average the respective values Use the following equation to calculate the percent difference D 100x 27 l If D is within 4 then the Model 5014 volumetric flow rate acceptance test has passed If the Model 50147 volumetric flow rate is slightly out of tolerance 5 the acceptance test should be classified as Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Setup Inlet System Installation Setup marginal If the volumetric flow rate performance is outside this range please perform a volumetric flow calibration For more information about the volumetric flow rate calibration see the Calibration chapter Setting up this monitor includes siting the monitor per local government agency requirements creating a waterproof inlet system installation with vertical support connecting the inlet system to the instrument through the dynamic heater system connecting vacuum lines establishing datalogging setting and making the power connections When siting the inlet system it is best to first establish the instrument location and height within the air monitoring station From whatever chosen surface the instrument is to rest on rack or table top add approximately 17 in
211. nent A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect plumbing from the pressure board assembly Figure 7 2 Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection 3 Disconnect the pressure board from the floor plate on the measurement interface board Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 15 Servicing Pressure Board Replacement 4 Remove the four pressure board assembly retaining screws and remove the pressure board assembly Figure 7 7 Unhook Pressure Cable from Interface Board Press Board Remove Plumbing Remove Screws 4 Figure 7 7 Replacing the Pressure Board Assembly 5 To install the pressure board assembly follow the previous steps in reverse PRESSURE SENSOR BD FLOW AMB 1 OPEN PORT OPEN PORT TO REAR PANEL DELTA PA PORT 1 TO REAR PANEL DELTA PA SWITCH PORT 1 TO PRIMARY MHEAD PORT 1 TO PRIMARY MHEAD PORT 2 Figure 7 8 Replacing the Pressure Board Assembly Plumbing Connection 7 16 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Servicing Pressure Board Calibration 6 Calibrate the pressure sensor Refer to the Pressure Board Calibration procedure that follows 7 After calibration perform a leak test as described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Use the following procedure
212. nfiguration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input channels available for configuration This screen is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration includes entering the Descriptor Units Decimal Places choice of 1 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config Pi EE EE Erer pi prin p CHA Pi Tapa tH iiohed BEEP uai Eoee nv Haat abe POE a a Pi EE EE Descriptor The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor or name for the selected analog input channel The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descriptor may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to IN1 to IN8 user input channel number e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Descriptor 3 48 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Units The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to V volts e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select
213. ng and Inspection on page 2 2 e Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures on page 2 3 e Setup on page 2 9 e Connecting External Devices on page 2 16 e Startup on page 2 21 e Data Content on page 2 22 e Shutdown on page 2 22 e Important Tips on page 2 22 Packaging and The Model 5014 instrument power cord and operator manual are Transp ort shipped in an ISTA 2A certified packaging and all other items accessories are shipped separately The ISTA 2A certified packaging is comprised of the instrument within an inner box which is secured within an outer box using foam end caps and corner bracing In this configuration the packaging is ready for shipping by carrier domestically and internationally Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Lifting Lifting Unpacking and Inspection 2 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual The inner box that the instrument resides in is an ISTA 1A certified packaging and is appropriate for transporting the instrument on local paved roads to the monitoring site Precautions should be taken to secure this package from shifting during local transport Using the ISTA 2A packaging is strongly recommended for transporting the instrument over poor roads or on highways When lifting the instrument use a procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and uprigh
214. nician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass Coefficient It is recommended to perform an annual mass calibration on the Model 50147 Beta Monitor e The foil sets must be kept in a clean container Do not touch the foil window with your fingers e The foils must not be wiped otherwise a loss or gain of mass can occur thereby biasing the mass calibration e Foils sets can be returned to Thermo Fisher Scientific for recalibration as necessary e Separate foil sets are recommended for periodic QC checks auditing and calibration e Should the user suspect the foil window s has been damaged scratched or coated these foil sets should be returned to Thermo Fisher Scientific for re calibration The null foil has the same approximate mass as a clean filter spot and the span foil is a calibrated mass increase above the null foil Therefore the foils come in a set and must not be mixed with other sets since a bias in mass calibration will occur Since the beta attenuation method is linear with mass increase the Model 5014 need not be calibrated in the exact range of beta attenuation per filter spot What is important is calibrating the corresponding beta count reduction with an increase of calibrated mass Thermo Fisher Scientific Mass Coefficient Auto Mass Coefficient Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Procedure Note To achieve the most accurate mass calibration the flo
215. nput e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument Action O OEH pikari Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Select Channel output channels available for configuration Channel choices include all voltage channels all current channels individual voltage channels 1 6 and individual current channels 1 6 if the 1 O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Instrument Controls Menu EH pikor AA Allow Over Under Range The Allow Over Under Range screen is used to select whether or not the analog outputs are allowed to exceed the maximum selected value of 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V or 20 mA or the minimum selected value of 0 V 0 mA or 4 mA By default this parameter is set to on and 5 over and under range is allowed for all analog output channels e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt Allow Over Under Range E Pi Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Select Action output configuration choices from which the user selects the parameter to adjust for the selected output channel Configu
216. nputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Analog Inputs ERED CHa Pi Tit The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining parameters that are required for Ethernet communications Note The instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DHCP Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Instrument Controls Menu ip gules POPUL PERG IP Address The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instr
217. nstruction Manual 3 27 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Commit Content The Commit Content screen is used to save any changes that have been made to any of the record fields for the selected record type Saving changes will erase record log file data for that record type If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Commit Content Ea E e Pet es a Foal i aa TY H CH pipiri PORE a ri ir ic a L i ri hark PT ns PEE AA F a i i A ii Calor MAMA Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging record field items to default values for the selected record type For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Reset to Default Content ifs bet DO E Ph dra A A EaR Iii PRAT Piya RAG PRT A rini i Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the currently selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging 3 28 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Co
218. nstruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Calibration Analog Output Calibrate Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero Operation Service Menu The Analog Output Calibration menu provides access to the 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels for calibration Current channels are visible only if the I O expansion board is installed The analog output calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Calibration The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter for a voltage channel or either 0 or 4 mA for a current channel depending on the selected range See the set output to field on the display e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Zero Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 85 Operation Service Menu Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output
219. nt Lock Unlock and If the instrument is locked via the front panel using Password gt Lock Local Remote Operation Instrument the instrument reports being in Remote mode In this mode the front panel is locked where data can be viewed settings can be viewed but not changed using the front panel interface and the remote Set commands are active If the instrument keyboard is unlocked via the front panel using Password gt Unlock Instrument the instrument reports being in Local mode the front panel interface is unlocked and settings can be changed from the front panel Refer to C Link Protocol Commands appendix for detailed information about mode allow mode and power up mode commands Change Password The Change Password screen is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument s front panel The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password 3 90 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Remove Password Unlock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel The unlo
220. ntation of standard pressure between 0 to 760 mmHg The following example sets the standard pressure to 730 mmHg Send set pres std 730 Receive set pres std 730 ok range This command reports the current PM range If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The following example reports that the PM range is set to 5 mg m according to Table B 5 Send range Receive range 4 5 000E 00 mg m3 set range selection This command selects the PM ranges according to Table B 5 The following example sets the PM range to 10 mg m Send set range 5 Receive set range 5 ok Table B 5 Standard Ranges Selection g m mg m 0 100 0 1 1 1000 1 0 2 2000 2 0 3 3000 3 0 4 5000 5 0 5 10000 10 0 6 C1 C1 7 C2 C2 8 C3 C3 rh th This command reports the current heater RH threshold for the sample The following example reports that the RH threshold is 30 Send rh th Receive rh th 30 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 39 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 40 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual set rh th value This command sets the heater RH threshold for the sample to value where value is a floating point number representation of RH threshold between 25 to 90 The following example sets the RH threshold to 35 Send set rh th 35 Receive set rh th 35 ok temp comp This command reports whether temperature
221. ntrols Menu Ea Cry Patio pH CE ATTE mid aro A Logging Period Min The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in minutes for the selected record format srec or Irec List of choices include off 1 5 15 30 and 60 minutes default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Logging Period Min PR Ea ilar Patio pH CE et nd La PS Memory Allocation The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of Percent total memory that may be used by the selected record type lrecs or srecs Percentages between 0 and 100 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both types of records and changing the percent allocated to one record type will automatically change the other e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Memory Allocation Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Data Treatment The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected record type whether the data should be averaged over the interval the minimum or maximum measured during the interval or the current value last value measured Data treatment doesn t apply to all data just to the concentration measurement All other data points log the current value at th
222. nts on page 7 7 Each kit consists of e one six foot cable e one terminal block e one snap track Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O expansion board requires e two DB37 kits e one DB25 kit Table 9 1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9 2 provides the cable color codes For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Note Table 9 2 provides the color coding for both 25 pin cables and 37 pin cables Color codes for pins 1 25 are for 25 pin cables color codes for pins 1 37 are for 37 pin cables A Table 9 1 Cable Options Description Cable Length DB37M to open end Six feet DB37F to open end Six feet DB25M to open end Six feet RS 232 Six feet Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 BLACK 20 RED BLACK 2 BROWN 21 ORANGE BLACK 3 RED 22 YELLOW BLACK 4 ORANGE 23 GREEN BLACK 5 YELLOW 24 GRAY BLACK 6 GREEN 25 PINK BLACK 7 BLUE End color codes for 25 pin cables continue for 37 pin cables 8 VIOLET 26 PINK GREEN 9 GRAY 27 PINK RED 19 WHITE 28 PINK VIOLET 11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE 12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE BROWN 13 BLACK WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE RED 14 BROWN WHITE 32 LIGHT BLUE VIOLET 15 RED WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE BLACK
223. nts are established the following steps are usually taken to complete the installation 1 Remove cover to the 5014 base and inspect for proper filter tape installation 2 Place 50141 unit in place of intended operation 3 Attach the insulated heater tube assembly to the 5 8 inch OD tube on top of the 50142 Figure 2 6 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup _ Tubing Connector Fasten Nut To Rear Panel 50147 H1 Figure 2 6 Heater Assembly 4 Attach a second tubing connector to the top of the heater tube 5 Carefully push additional 5 8 inch OD stainless steel tubing through the roof flange and then drop into the tubing union on top of the heater 6 Any exposed 5 8 inch OD stainless steel tubing should be insulated with additional pipe insulation inside the shelter 7 Sleeve any additional water tight capping over the tubing that now extends above the roof line 8 Sleeve the white Delrin plastic tripod adapter over the 5 8 inch OD tubing to an appropriate height to accommodate the tripod and ambient T RH sensor assembly Tighten this adapter against the stainless steel tubing using the two setscrews Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 13 Installation Setup 9 Sleeve the tripod over the tripod adapter to a proper height and tighten Using the adjustable legs of the tripod plumb the inlet tube assembly 10 Attach the white ambient T RH sensor radiation
224. o Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 3 Loosen the kynar fittings using the wrench and slide out sample flow RTD 4 Unplug the RTD connector from the measurement interface board flowtemp1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing Transformer Replacement 5 Carefully install the new RTD by following the previous steps in reverse Match the marked black line on the RTD to be flush with the fitting Note The black line is the pre measured depth for the RTD a 6 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Udjustable Wrench Unplug RTD Connector Figure 7 17 Replacing the RTD Transformer Use the following procedure to replace the transformer Figure 7 18 Re p lacement Equipment Required Transformer assembly Philips screwdriver 2 amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 7 34 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Radius Tube Replacement 2 Disconnect cables from the measurement interface board and motherboard 3 Unscrew the four mounting s
225. oard are special functions BKSP is used to move the cursor in the entry line one place to the left deleting the character that was to the left of the cursor and moving any character at or to the right of the cursor one place to the left PAGE is used to change the keyboard character page For the English language this switches between upper and lower case alphabetic characters SAVE stores the string from the entry line into the parameter Alternately if the active cursor is moved to the entry line may be pressed to store the string from the entry line into the parameter DH iid MAMA The Model 5014 utilizes the menu driven firmware as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3 3 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen normally displays the current PM concentrations but also has additional Run screens for ambient conditions sample conditions and mass sensor data From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview submenu contains related instrument settings This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail Refer to the appropriate sections for more information
226. oderada ads 7 4 Replacement Parts Listin an 7 5 OS 7 6 External Device Connection Components 2 7 7 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Pa a a AEE ia 7 9 Fuse Replacement iii erage 7 10 Fan Filter Replacement cdta 7 11 Detector Amplifier Assembly Replacement ooooonnonnonnnnnononnnnnninnncnos 7 12 Detector Amplifier Board Calibracion adan 7 13 External Pump Replacements ass do dolorido 7 14 Pressure Board Replacement viii ita 7 15 Pressure Board Calibration sseessssssssserersesestsrsssststsrreesrsesesrestsrsrereee 7 17 Analog Output Testi ias 7 18 Analog Output Calibration gg asec tetera lade 7 20 Analog Ui pure APA O M6 2820 s ct dace ete da cts ate antee cs isua cea eether Seas eeaal ati 7 21 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts s s 7 21 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale oe ee eeeeeeeneeeeeeees 7 22 Themistor Replacementininnia tata 7 23 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement coononcicnonnnnnnnnnnconnnns 7 24 Digital Output Board Replacement 2 4 0 ce acer an ae 7 26 Motherboard Replacements Aces elaine at hs etc 7 26 Measurement Interface Board Replacement esesseeeeseeseeeereeeeeees 7 27 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual xiii Contents xiv Chapter 8 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Photo Interrupt Board Replacement 21 3cc cce 24csccceaccuieiet caeteacstetities 7 29 Proportional Valve Replacement 2 01 citascss stuecesdestccncteane
227. of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND The optional I O expansion board includes eight analog voltage inputs These inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices such as meteorological equipment The user may assign a label unit and a conversion table 2 to 10 points Each point in the conversion table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding user defined reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 volts The instrument includes one power fail relay on the motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200 VDC Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components The power fail relay is Form C both normally opened and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form A normally opened contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode info
228. ometer If the Model 50147 sensor performance is within this tolerance the acceptance test has passed Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures One Point Volumetric Flow Rate Verification 2 8 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual If the sensor is slightly out of tolerance 12 mmHg the acceptance test should be classified as marginal If the sensor performance is outside this range please perform a sensor calibration For more information about the barometric pressure sensor calibration see the Calibration chapter The flow rate of the Model 5014 should be verified during this acceptance test Prior to this test it is important for the previous temperature and pressure acceptance tests to be completed Should the ambient temperature flow temperature or barametric sensors require calibration this should be done prior to the flow rate verification e Press M to return to the Diagnostics menu and choose Flows gb Guided fant fiie fini i The Flow screen read only displays the volumetric flow rate in liters per minute The flow is measured by the internal pressure board sensors Attach the small sample tube adapter to the Model 5014 inlet Depending upon your NIST traceable volumetric flow transfer standard FTS you may either attach your FTS now or add the flow audit adapter to accommodate any flexible tubing that your FTS may require Allow 60 seco
229. on Re calibrate Display is off 6 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Wrong contrast setting Adjust contrast setting Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Malfunction Possible Cause Action LCD cable loose Check connection and cable integrity LCD defective Replace display The change of Keyboard not enabled Enable keyboard through menu parameters is not possible No mass value ADC defect Mains are broken No high voltage value Detector defect Change the main circuit board Check and repair Check HV Change detector No automatic filter change Mechanical defect If pump is not running If the filter change parameter reaches the FC value for the second time then the monitor stops Check filter transport motor and mechanics Make sure tape is adhered to take up reel and intact Check pump power supply and wires Adjust filter change parameters LCD out of function or dark Wrong contrast LCD defect Connection cables from the main board are broken Adjust contrast Change LCD Replace display ribbon cable Thermo Fisher Scientific Air flow rate disturbance or air flow is too low Air flow parameters wrong No connection with plug 25 pump Pump do not work properly Very high pollution or blocking in the air passage Check AP calibration valve are in closed position Check air flow rate parameters Put
230. oncnncnrnnonoooso 2 11 Figure 2 6 Heater Assembly ou ccc cecccscecesesesceseseseetesesesestetesesesteeseseees 2 13 Figure 2 7 Rear Panel Plumbing Schematic oocooicincincncinconinicnnnccnrncnnrnonooos 2 15 Figure 2 8 0 Terminal Board ViewS ooooococoiciocicionincocinconinccncnnornnnnrnononos 2 17 Figure 2 9 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector 2 18 Figure 2 10 D O Terminal Board ViewS ooooiniocinioninccninconinccnrncnnrnconrnononos 2 19 Figure 2 11 25 Pin Terminal Board VIBWS oooococicicococonnnncoconrncnonncnrnnoononoso 2 20 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display ooooooociciocococcconnononocnrnononocnrnnonocoronnononoso 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel PUSADUTLONS ooocoicononcconncnonccnrnonocncnronnonororononnoooso 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware ooooococicininoconccnincnnncnrnnonoooos 3 5 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector 3 11 Figure 3 5 Common FAQS 0 es 3 26 Figure 3 6 Detecta 3 27 Figure 4 1 Differential Pressure and Vacuum Calibration Ports 4 6 Figure 5 1 U S EPA PMG GU sees cocos tin 5 3 Figure 5 2 European PM io Inlet cc ceccccecesesesceceseseseecesesesesceseseseeteneseseees 5 4 Figure 5 3 PM2s5 Sharp Cut Cyclone ococoocococccoconiccconocononocorncononononornconrnccnrnncnoos 5 5 Figure 5 4 Inspecting and Cleaning the FaN ooioncicocicconincnninccnincnnrnccnrnnnnoos 5 6 Figure 5 5 Replacing the Filter Tape o
231. ons Designed to meet CE EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 A3 2003 EN 61010 1 UL 61010 1 2004 CSA 22 2 No 61010 1 2004 FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B Source and Detector B Source Carbon 14 lt 3 7 MBq lt 100 pCi Sealed Source Device Proportional Detector Standard System Configuration Menu driven software for user interaction via 320 x 420 pixels graphics display Connecting and Interface Cables and Vacuum Pump 3 foot heated sample tube Ambient T RH Assembly Consumables for average first year s operation ambient iPort Software for Local or Remote Communication Sample Heater 3 foot insulated heater tube Three Modes of Heater Control OFF Heater is turned off in non condensing environment TEMP fixed sample temperature RH Dynamic Heating of sample at set sample RH threshold e g 50 RH Instrument Performance 16 67 l min 1s stable conditions Measurement Range 0 to 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 10 0 mg m 0 to 100 1 000 2 000 3 000 5 000 10 000 g m Minimum Detection Limit lt 4 g m 1 hour O 26 lt 1 pg m 24 hour 2 o Resolution 0 1 g m Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 1 7 Introduction Specifications 1 8 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Precision 2 0 g m lt 80 yg mi 4 5 ug m3 gt 80 g m 24 hour Accuracy for Mass Measurement 5 using NIST traceable mass foil set Data Averaging and Output Real time Mass Conc Avera
232. ons and to trigger the instrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that instrument This is achieved by using the supported Gesytec commands listed below Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 50147 Gesytec Protocol specification see the following topics Serial Communication Parameters on page D 1 TCP Communication Parameters on page D 2 Instrument Address on page D 2 Abbreviations Used on page D 2 Basic Command Structure on page D 2 Block Checksum on page D 3 Gesytec Commands on page D 3 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the Series to support Gesytec protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual D 1 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Instrument Address Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure D 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the Gesytec protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for Gesytec 9882 The Gesytec instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by a 3 digit ASCII n
233. oociiconccicinocinincncnncnrnononcnronornnnonoooso 5 8 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 6 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 7 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap ocoo icoo i 7 4 Figure 7 2 Model 50147 Component LayOUt oocooocincocinconinconincnccnrnccnrnccnrncnooos 7 8 Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the A i eee scales eck eee ccs dect tetera rid ecelted choad as teed cath 7 9 Figure 7 4 Replacing the Fan oo ccc cccececeesescetesesescetesesestetesesesteeeeseees 7 12 Figure 7 5 Replacing the Detector Amplifier Assembly 7 13 Figure 7 6 Replacing the PUMP o oocioonociconoconnnococonnncncnncnrnnnonocororoonncoronnononoso 7 15 Figure 7 7 Replacing the Pressure Board Assembly 7 16 Figure 7 8 Replacing the Pressure Board Assembly Plumbing Connection 7 16 Figure 7 9 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins 7 19 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual xvii Figures xviii Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Figure 7 10 Replacing the ThermistOF ooociciciconcininoncnnnnnnnonncnrnnecocnrnnnononoss 7 24 Figure 7 11 Replacing the I O Expansion Board Optional 7 25 Figure 7 12 Rear Panel Board Connectors oocooccinocoincooinccnnn
234. or associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Terminal Board PCB The terminal board PCB assemblies are circuit boards with a D Sub Assemblies connector on one side and a series of screw terminals on the other side These assemblies provide a convenient mechanism for connecting wires from a data system to the analyzer s I O connectors The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for iSeries instruments e T O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e D O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e 25 pin terminal board PCB assembly included with optional I O expansion board 1 0 Terminal Board Figure 2 8 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 2 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Note Not all of the 1 O available in the instrument is brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A 2 16 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail B See Detail A j Tels ml I mie Sisin A Ae ie dk Eisini 20900900990996 i es Lie Ay h 7 Detail A Detail B As
235. ormat B 43 tz Reports sets the timezone string for the NTP server B 50 up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B 34 vac mass coef Reports sets the current vacuum mass coefficient B 33 vac pres Reports the current vacuum pressure B 20 vac pres span Reports sets the vacuum pressure span B 34 vac pres zero Reports the vacuum pressure zero B 34 vf pres cal def Sets vacuum and flow pressure calibration defaults B 34 avg24 time This command reports the 24 hour averaging time in hours and minutes The following example shows that the averaging time is set to 18 30 Send Receive avg24 time avg24 time 18 30 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 9 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements set avg 24 time hh mm hh hours 01 to 23 mm minutes 01 to 59 This command sets the 24 hour averaging time to start averaging the concentration from h mm until next 24 hours It is then set to next 24 hours automatically The following example sets the 24 hour averaging time to 17 50 Send set avg24 time 17 50 Receive set avg24 time 17 50 ok flags This reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the status of the mode pressure and temperature compensation status concentration units concentration modes and alarms To decode the flags each hexadecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in the Figure B 1 It is the binary digits that define the status of each parameter Send flags Receive flags 000
236. orted for the Model Supported 50 Table E 1 Read Commands for 5014 Command Description C output of the dust mass concentration in pg m actual mode HT 24 h daily average concentration ug m temperature sampling head y temperature dust sampling chamber temperature inside of the flow meter orifice different pressure of the air flow measuring module in Pa low pressure suction chamber C e T O T O C 0U barometer in hPa air flow sampling head Cc JJ norm air flow 273K 1013hPa JO air flow rate regulation 0 100 JR relative humidity value RH JS sample relative humidity value RH m1 non filtered mass in ug 0 reports offline in service mode online if NOT in service mode UA beta count rate 1 s UB beta zero count rate 1 s Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual E 1 ESM Protocol Commands ESM Commands Supported E 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Command Description UC alpha count rate 1 s UD alpha zero count rate 1 s UO radon EEC activity concentration Bq m V instrument model and software version Z read date time of day answer yy mm dd hh mm ss ZZ read date time answer yymmddhhmmss read device address flags Table E 2 Write Commands for 5014 Command Description d4 baud rate d7 device address K4 con
237. perly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Squeeze the thermistor latch and pull the thermistor assembly from the AMB TEMP connector on the measurement interface board 3 Snap the new thermistor into the AMB TEMP connector Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement 7 24 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement A Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermistor Figure 7 10 Replacing the Thermistor Use the following procedure to replace the optional I O expansion board Figure 7 11 Equipment Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the rear panel Figure 7 12 4 Pop the board off of the mounting studs and remove the board Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement 5 To install the I O expansion board follow the previous steps in reverse
238. puts 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 Error Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Registers MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Request Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Starting Address Hi 0x00 Starting Address Lo 0x02 Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00 Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D Response Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Output Status 11 15 Ox0A The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value 0xCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read Holding Input Registers reads the measurement data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous
239. r calibration The detector calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration Auto Detector Calibration The Auto Detector Calibration screen allows the user to optimize the detector performance This should be done at least once per year and as often as once per quarter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Auto This procedure will take approximately 30 minutes until completed Thereafter a high voltage HV beta reference threshold and alpha threshold will be assigned a new valve 4 12 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A A Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly you should inspect the components frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined This chapter includes the following preventive maintenance information e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Replacement Parts on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Outside Case on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Inlets
240. r Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and Pressure Span pressure sensor calibration span point Note The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres Calibration gt Span Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Service Menu Restore Default The Restore Default Calibration screen allows the user to reset the default Calibration values e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres Calibration gt Set Defaults Wi mri Vacuum Flow Calibration The Vacuum Flow Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the vacuum flow zero vacuum flow span or reset default values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow DH Guided Piet Calibrate Vacuum Flow The Calibrate Vacuum Flow Zero screen calibrates the vacuum flow sensor Zero atzero value e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Vac Flow Zero 3 76 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu WH mid Ro Ea Aim PTE i Miimii i EN EUH E Sanat Bone ETET hei Bast i 5 Calibrate Vacuum The Calibrate Vacuum Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set Pressure Span the flow sensor cali
241. ration 24 Hour Average 24 Hour Ave rage The 24 Hour Average screen defines a start time during which concentration measurement is averaged over a daily 24 hours period The average concentration of the primary readings are calculated for that time period and averaged out A new 24 hour average concentration is displayed once per day The display shows the current 24 hour average PM concentration The next line of the display is used to change the 24 hour averaging time e Inthe Main Menu choose 24HR Averages Mi hiv Pop E EH dE E 5 EME hae TEEN EE DN EEE TE a EY hed ae 24 Hour Average The 24 Hour Average Start Time screen allows the user to adjust the 24 Start Time hour averaging start time e Inthe Main Menu choose 24HR Averages gt Avg Time POE E CH bo bet EN EEE TE a nr PNG Calibration Factors Calibration factors are determined during automatic and manual Menu calibration and are used to correct the concentration readings The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration factors as shown below The instrument can also be calibrated manually using this menu For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation Calibration Factors Menu The calibration factors for the PM BKG offset and PM COEF slope are set to 0 0 and 1 0 by default Should regional settings require an adjustment to these val
242. ration choices include selecting range setting minimum maximum values and choosing the signal to output e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt All Voltage Channels All Current Channels Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 ERED CHA Pi Ta oH miiohel BEEP at Bose BME TY Saad Haat abe POES one AS EE EE 3 44 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Select Range The Select Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog output channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 and 0 10 V Possible ranges for the current outputs are 0 20 mA and 4 20 mA e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Select Range Minimum and Maximum The Minimum and Maximum Value screens are used to edit the zero 0 Value and full scale 100 values respectively in percentages for the selected analog output channel See Table 3 4 for a list of choices The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way The following example shows the set minimum value screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt IO Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Set Minimum or Maximum Value i A haa Table 3 4 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale O
243. rations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item 1 8 Concentrations The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected streaming data item The currently selected Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Instrument Controls Menu item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Concentrations Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item For Common Flags and Detector A Flags see Figure 3 5 and Figure 3 6 for data descriptions e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Other Measurements 3 36 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Inputs TCP IP Settings Use DHCP Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Analog I
244. rature sensor calibration For more information about the temperature sensor calibration see the Calibration chapter Record the ambient RH sensor reading from the Model 50147 and compare to your NIST traceable Hygrometer The Model 5014 RH sensor should compare within 2 RH tolerance of your NIST traceable hygrometer If the RH sensor performance is within this tolerance the acceptance test has passed Note The ambient temperature verification should be completed prior to performing the RH sensor verification due to a thermal compensation applied to the RH sensor Furthermore try to avoid RH comparisons lt 30 RH and gt 80 RH A If the RH sensor is slightly out of tolerance 3 RH the acceptance test should be classified as marginal If the sensor performance is outside this range please perform a RH sensor calibration For more information about the RH sensor calibration see the Calibration chapter It is recommended that the NIST traceable hygrometer should also compare well with the RH measurement used within a gravimetric laboratory that is part of a compliance program Record the Model 5014 barometric pressure sensor reading This value is in units of mmHg If necessary using the pressure unit conversion Table 2 1 to convert your NIST traceable measurement to units of mmHg for an appropriate comparison The Model 50147 barometric sensor should compare within 10 0 mmHg tolerance of your NIST traceable bar
245. reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the optional I O expansion board Equipment Required Multimeter 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 9 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal 7 20 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Input Calibration The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Output Cal menu press to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press Ce 4 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press Ce The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero Note When calibrating the analog output always calibrate zero first and then calibrate full scale A 5 Use l until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line 0 0 V or 0 0 or 4 0 mA then press to save the value 6 Press Cu to return to the previous screen 7 Press Y J_ to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Use unti
246. reas e Instrument control e Monitoring signals e Measurement calculations e Output communication Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls the front panel user interface The low level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different version is detected Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for the communications between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processors The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level processor to produce the final measurement values The one second accumulated counts are accumulated and reported for the user specified averaging time If this averaging time is greater than ten seconds the measurement is still reported every 10 secon
247. records ty Ea Cad Py Tito i i mid Larios CH mt Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data For example if 20 Jan 2007 10 00 is entered then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time If set to one minute logging this would be at 20 Jan 2007 10 01 ERED CH Pi Tit CH bo bet PPE Did bea Miri het E H Ss ir The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH Guided Piet Erase Log The Erase Log screen is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type only not both srecs and lrecs e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Erase Log Wi hid Select Content The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use to configure the data to be logged When a field is selected a submenu list appears of the items to choose from to assign to those fields Item types are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed These record fields comprise a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu before the changes will apply Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data for the
248. repteiaecesianeese 7 30 Detector Assembly Replacements tidad 7 31 Flow RTD Replacement 2 c ccc8 sdiveterdinascecivevsexsdseagtsnecesttardietesdeanee 7 33 Transformer Replacement 2 124 coassaca de 7 34 Radius Tube Replacenve nts e a heated oe ip atee 7 35 Ambient RH Temperature Replaco ment ita eared 7 36 Front Panel Board Replacem ntan ria 7 38 LCD Module Replacement iuicinndi iio 7 39 Service LOCATIONS net 7 41 System Descritor 8 1 Hard waterpolo cba 8 1 Primary Measurement Head ito 8 3 ara A ets Neen ota tate tat ioe ste ates 8 3 Cam Photo Interrupt Board ct il Dee ae 8 3 Counter Wheel Interrupt Board Assembly oooocoonnncnioninncnnonanncnnncnnos 8 3 Proportional Mi tl 8 3 Cam Moto aia id 8 3 Tape Mot ip 8 3 Pressure Boarder sareetan naasa thet 3s a R 8 3 A a e EE eE AE ET S 8 4 Instr ment Control A a AAE RAAE 8 4 Monitoring Sienals vuinniii aida 8 4 Output Communicator dai 8 4 Electronics ni ie 8 5 A er De a fost a Fa npr ne one Eee Fo 8 5 Measurement Interface Board 2 2022s ctr tected ii 8 6 Measurement Interface Board Connectors seseeeseseereeseeeeneeseees 8 6 Flow Sensor Syste tiles Acvatasgede sated daivasdusaatas bidvensderad eotatecutate ya tabdeuatly 8 6 Pressure Sensor Assembly iscaxesccessaysiateds adas 8 6 Detector AmiplifiernAssem bly iia 8 6 Digital OQ tput Dd chet acer eet ser cca cence vais 8 7 I O Expansion Board prontos 8 7 Front Panel Connector Board x cctecdsicGouieeel cha ta bois 8 7 PO Coin PONE MS arial
249. responses are generally echoed with a data element appended Note If the Service Mode is active C Link set commands are not allowed This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while the unit is being serviced locally A If an incorrect command is sent an error message is generated The list of error responses is shown in Table B 1 The following example sends the incorrect command set unit mg m3 instead of the correct command set conc unit mg m3 Send set unit mg m3 Receive set unit mg m3 bad cmd Thermo Fisher Scientific Commands List Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Table B 1 Error Response Messages Command Response Description bad cmd Command is not recognized too high Supplied value is higher than the upper limit too low Supplied value is lower than the lower limit invalid string Supplied string invalid typically because a letter was detected when the value should be numeric data not valid Supplied value is not acceptable for entered command can t wrong settings Command not allowed for current measurement mode can t mode is service Command not allowed while instrument is in service mode feature not enabled 1 0 expansion board is not detected flags no alarm active No measurement alarms are active The save and set save params commands duplicated for backward compatibility store parameters
250. ressure differential across the orifice Table 2 1 Pressure Units Conversion Pressure Conversions mmHg atm x 0 75006 mmHg inHg x 25 4 mmHg hPa x 0 75006 Assuming adequate time has passed for thermal equilibration approximately 1 hour and the vacuum pump has been drawing room air into the instrument compare the ambient temperature sample temperature and flow temperature to your NIST traceable thermometer placed at the inlet tube see Figure 2 2 Note Please be sure that the pump exhaust or any other heat source is not influencing the sensor reading of the temperature RH cable assembly Please be sure the side panel has been removed for at least 60 minutes A Figure 2 2 Model 50147 Sampling Room Air Under Stable Conditions Thermo Fisher Scientific One Point Temperature Verification One Point RH Sensor Verification One Point Barometric Pressure Verification Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Record the temperature sensor readings from the Model 50147 and compare to your NIST traceable thermometer Each of these measurements should be within 2 C tolerance of your NIST traceable thermometer Within this tolerance the temperature sensors have passed the acceptance test If the sensors are slightly out of tolerance 3 C the acceptance test should be classified as marginal If the sensor performance is outside this range please perform a tempe
251. rldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual v About This Manual Where to Get Help vi Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Prunciple ot Operation es isa e ole 1 3 SPECIACACONS ui tdaaiia ce aieiaa a eesis assas 1 7 Chapter 2 Instala 2 1 P ckaging and Pranspott is a da 2 1 A O N 2 2 Unpacking and Inspection ssssssssssseseseeetseststerersrsssrsrstsrsiseseseseseseseseses 2 2 Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures ococooncononocncnnonncnnncnnnnnnnnnss 2 3 Acceptance Teta ii 2 4 One Point Temperature Verification canso 2 7 One Point RH Sensor Vertice 2 7 One Point Barometric Pressure VerificatiON ooonnninnnononenenerns 2 7 One Point Volumetric Flow Rate Verification s s ssssssssesseseseseeseses 2 8 Sd 2 9 A 2 9 1 visi cident es A nn WELK aa i a aiia 2 10 Sample Tube Extension Leonora dado taeeceandstaredsectetondacue 2 12 Rack Mounting Option stictccnia leido 2 12 Monitor Installation ba 2 12 Connecting External Devices miii 2 16 Terminal Board PCB Assemb litte cavadetne tect seeds ona eee 2 16 T O Te rminal BO ater ad Male Racor 2 16 D O Terminal Board oa 2 18 25 Pin Terminal Borda Aci 2 19 Power Connections iia 2 21 SU tss 2 21 Data Conten
252. rmation from the analyzer as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out from each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed Digital Inputs Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including e Filter tape change e Turn pump off e Turn pump on e Analog outputs to zero e Analog outputs to full scale The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer The active state can be user defined in firmware Serial Ports Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be linked using one PC serial port The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in the firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 115200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link e MODBUS Slave e Gesytec Bayern Hessen e Streaming Data e ESM The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer datalogger or PC Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 8 9 System Description 1 0 Components RS 232 Conne
253. rts sets ambient temperature alarm maximum value B 12 max alarm amb temp Reports sets ambient temperature alarm minimum value B 12 min alarm baro pres max Reports sets barometric pressure alarm maximum value B 12 alarm baro pres min Reports sets barometric pressure alarm minimum value B 12 alarm bench status Reports the bench status B 12 alarm beta count Reports sets beta count alarm maximum value B 13 max alarm beta count Reports sets beta count alarm minimum value B 13 min alarm board temp Reports sets board temperature alarm maximum value B 13 max alarm board temp Reports sets board temperature alarm minimum value B 13 min alarm conc avg pm Reports sets average PM concentration alarm maximum B 13 max value alarm conc avg pm Reports sets average PM concentration alarm minimum B 13 min value alarm conc inst pm Reports sets instant PM concentration alarm maximum value B 14 max alarm conc inst pm Reports sets instant PM concentration alarm minimum value B 14 min alarm filter tape Reports the filter tape status B 14 status alarm flow max Reports sets flow alarm maximum value B 14 alarm flow min Reports sets flow alarm minimum value B 14 alarm flow pres max Reports sets flow pressure alarm maximum value B 15 alarm flow pres min Reports sets flow pressure alarm minimum value B 15 alarm flow temp Reports sets flow temperature alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm flow temp Reports sets flow temperature alarm minimum value B 15 min alar
254. rument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Manual gt Bench s Press Ce 3 Loosen both reel nuts on tape spindler Remove used filter tape and empty tape spool from tape spindles 4 Insert new filter tape on left tape spindle and tighten reel nut 5 Insert new blank pick up spool on right tape spindle 6 Route tape according to Figure 5 5 7 Attach end of tape to blank tape spool on right tape spindle with 2 inch of tape 8 Turn blank tape spool until there is two complete wrappings of tape 9 Tighten right reel nut From Filter Tape Control gt Manual gt choose Tape and press to MOVE tape 10 From the main menu choose Alarms gt Instrument Alarms to verify that there are no filter tape alarms 11 Replace left side cover Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 5 7 Preventive Maintenance Greasing the Cam Figure 5 5 Replacing the Filter Tape Greasing the Use the following procedure to grease the cam Cam Equipment Required Dow Corning Molykote G N 1 Apply metal assembly paste around the parameter of the cam 5 8 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Troubleshooting Thermo Fisher Scientific Guides Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability In the event of problems or failure the troubleshooting guidelines board level connection diagrams connector pin descriptions and testing procedures pr
255. rument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Point 1 10 E Pri The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt Volts A pH piisi A MPAA The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 99999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure Thermo Fisher Scientific Screen Contrast Service Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt User Value CHRD CIA mn EUs EEE Tb Bone The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Intensities between 0 and 100 in increments of 5 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures
256. s 9 o000000000000000000 coo00000000000000000 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation Range Menu Set Custom Ranges Custom Ranges 3 12 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 PM 2 33 3 AVG PM 3 5 5 Flow 4 34 7 Ambient Temperature 5 7 9 Flow Temperature 6 36 11 Ambient Relative Humidity Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A The Set Custom Ranges menu lists three custom ranges which are user defined In the mg m mode any value between 0 1 mg m and 10 00 mg m can be specified as a range In the g m mode any value between 100 g m and 10000 g m can be specified as a range e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges RIE ENE Pit En if Lh ber Lt E di cileb PhP A PA Adi Libia E Mihei i The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges The display shows the current custom range The next line of the display is used to set the range For more information about selecting ranges see Range above e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges gt Custom Range 1 2 or 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Ope
257. s Analog Voltage Thermo Fisher Scientific Outputs System Description 1 0 Components The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides solenoid driver outputs and relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other Eight solenoid driver outputs open collector are provided along with a corresponding 24 VDC supply pin on the connector The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage signals and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of OV to10 VDC Six current outputs are provided with a normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and the function key panel and graphics display It serves as a central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight
258. s command automatically sets the new value for flow span based on the corrected flow entered The following example sets the new value for flow span based on the corrected flow to 17 2 LPM Send set cal flow span 17 2 Receive set cal flow span 17 2 ok set cal vac pres span This command automatically sets the vacuum span based on the vacuum pressure entered at the time of calibration The following example successfully sets the new value for vacuum span based on the vacuum pressure to 120 5 mmHg Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration Send set cal vac pres span 120 5 Receive set cal vac pres span 120 5 ok set cal vac flow zero This command automatically triggers the filter change and sets the new value for vacuum and flow zero The following example successfully sets the vacuum and flow zero Send set cal vac flow zero Receive set cal vac flow zero ok coef pm This command reports PM coefficient The following example reports that the PM coefficient is 1 200 Send coef pm Receive coef pm 1 200 set coef pm value This command sets the PM coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the PM coefficient to 1 200 Send set coef pm 1 200 Receive set coef pm 1 200 ok flow pres span This command reports the flow pressure span recorded at the time of calibration The followin
259. s initiated with an automatic zero adjustment of the mass signal The filter change interval and time of day can be user adjusted Additionally automatic filter changes will occur if the mass on the filter exceeds 1 500 pg since the last filter change or if the flow rate through the filter tape is reduced by more than 5 due to potentially restrictive particle deposition Using the example of PMio monitoring ambient air is drawn into a 10 micron um size selective inlet which discriminates against particles with an equivalent aerodynamic diameter above 10 um This inlet has been approved previously through prior U S EPA designations RFPS 0699 130 131 and 132 and is also listed within 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix L as a 10 MICRON INLET including model SA246b The volumetric flow rate at the inlet entrance is 16 67 liters per minute 1 m hour In addition the ambient temperature and relative humidity is measured via a naturally aspirated radiation shield and standard sensor as part of the volumetric flow control and dynamic heating system Note Further particle discrimination would be achieved by inserting a PM or PM cyclone between the 10 micron inlet and sample tube TSP inlets and European style inlets are also available with the 50147 A The ambient particulate is then drawn down a vertically mounted heated sample tube The heat applied to the sampe is adjustable to either a fixed temperature or a RH threshold at the filter spot The p
260. s which corresponds to the filter tape movement The following example reports that the tape count is 250 Send tape counter Receive tape counter 250 vac pres This command reports the current vacuum pressure for the detector in mmHg The following example reports that the vacuum pressure is 100 mmHg Send vac pres Receive vac pres 100 0 mmHg clr records This command will clear all lrecs and srecs that have been saved Send clr records Receive clr records ok set clr lrecs set clr srecs These commands will clear only the lrecs or only the srecs that have been saved The following example clears srecs Send set clr srecs Receive set clr srecs ok set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec set copy sp to stream These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad sp into the lrec srec or streaming data list Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list in scratch pad into the lrecs list Send set copy sp to lrec Receive set copy sp to lrec ok set cop
261. sample rh max value These commands set the sample relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing sample relative humidity alarm limits in percent The following example sets the sample relative humidity alarm maximum value to 40 Send set alarm sample rh min 40 0 Receive set alarm sample rh min 40 0 ok alarm status det This command reports the board status of the detector as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the detector board status is OK Send alarm status det Receive alarm status det ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Diagnostics Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics alarm tape counter max This command reports the current filter tape count alarm maximum value setting The following example reports that the filter tape count alarm maximum value is 480 Send alarm filter tape counter max Receive alarm filter tape counter max 480 set alarm filter tape counter max value This command sets the filter tape count alarm maximum value where value is an integer number representing filter tape alarm limits The following example sets the filter tape count alarm maximum value to 490 Send set alarm filter tape counter max 490 Receive set alarm filter tape counter max 490 ok alarm vac pres min alarm vac pres max These commands report the current vacuum pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following exa
262. selected record type only as the format of the stored data is changed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content PME kee EE EE 3 24 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Choose Field Data Concentrations Other Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Choose Field Data submenu displays a list of the types of data that can be logged for the current field Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Field 1 32 Ea My ESTE i ii myi Lidi To E Cue Caja ii The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected record field The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below The display shows the current heater for the mode selected PM e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Concentrations The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the select
263. sembled Connector Figure 2 8 0 Terminal Board Views Table 2 2 0 Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Analog 13 Power_Fail_NC 2 Analog ground 14 Power_Fail_COM 3 Analog2 15 Power_Fail_NO 4 Analog ground 16 TTL_Input1 5 Analog3 17 TTL_Input2 6 Analog ground 18 TTL_Input3 7 Analog4 19 TTL_Input4 8 Analog ground 20 Digital ground 9 Analog5 21 TTL_Input5 10 Analog ground 22 TTL_Input6 11 Analog6 23 TTL_Input7 12 Analog ground 24 Digital ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 17 Installation Connecting External Devices D O Terminal Board 2 18 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual The analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 2 9 See Table 2 3 for channels and pin connections 9 o000000000000000000 c000000000000000000 O Figure 2 9 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector Table 2 3 Default Analog Outputs Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 PM 2 33 3 AVG PM 3 15 5 Flow 4 34 7 Ambient Temperature 5 17 9 Flow Temperature 6 36 11 Ambient Relative Humidity Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Figure 2 10 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to
264. set the flow calibration flow point The flow calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration CH vided Piet 3 78 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Auto Flow Calibration The Auto Flow Calibration screen allows the user to view and set the correct flow rate The span value is automatically calculated e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Auto A ee meh dt MP or PPP LES mi AG aes Manual Flow Calibration The Manual Flow Calibration screen allows the user to view and incrementally set the flow sensor calibration span factor e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Manual EIR Pep En EPIA Er PA mie AG aes Mass Calibration The Mass Calibration submenu is used to view and set the mass calibration point The mass calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instr
265. sher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin gt gt gt gt gt al w N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description 24 24 24 24 24 24 MONITOR 24V Power Monitor Ground FRONT PANEL BD Oo a N O o A WW N gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o a gt w N N N N N N N N oOo a A 0 N gt O Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal LD6 LCD Signal LD2 LCD Signal LD7 LCD Signal LD3 LCD Signal LCD Bias Voltagel 5V Ground Ground LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 1 Select Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designator Pin wo U U Wo WoW N N N FP 0 N gt O O CO N Signal Description Keypad Col 4 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Ground Ground Ground Ground 24V 24V RS232 RS485 A P1 A OO aoa N oon A WW N NC Serial Port 1 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 1 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 1 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 1 CTS RS485 IN NC RS232 RS485 B OOO N oon A WW N NC Serial Port 2 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 2 TX RS4
266. shield assembly onto a portion of the exposed tripod adapter 11 Place the PMio or PM inlet into the 5 8 inch stainless steel tubing all burrs should have been removed during installation 12 Feed one end of the black 25 foot T RH cable trough he roof flange assembly and connect to the bottom of the ambient T RH assembly 13 Connect the other end of the T RH cable to the back of the instrument RH Temp 14 Attach the heater power connector to HEATER 1 2 14 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup RH Temperature _____ Final Assembly lt Heater Assembly 3 Ft Pump Assembly Local PC Figure 2 7 Rear Panel Plumbing Schematic 15 Using the available 3 8 inch green vacuum tubing connect the intake of the pump to the vacuum fitting at the rear panel of the 50147 16 Plug the pump power chord into the AC PUMP receptacle at the rear of the 5014 base instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 2 15 Installation Connecting External Devices Connecting Several components are available for connecting external devices to iSeries External Devices instruments These connection options include e Individual terminal board PCB assemblies standard e Terminal block and cable kits optional e Individual cables optional For detailed information on the optional connection components refer to the Optional Equipment chapter F
267. t Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person may lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A If there is obvious damage to the shipping container when the instrument is received notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument 1 Remove the instrument from its shipping container s and set it on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear 2 Remove the cover to expose the internal components 3 Remove the packing material in the analyzer Figure 2 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Remove Packing 2 pieces Remove Packing 2 pieces Units without Optional I O Board Units with Optional 1 0 Board Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Thermo Fisher Scientific Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 4 Check for possible damage during shipment 5 Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached 6 Re install the cover 7 Remove any protective plast
268. t Option Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 9 7 Optional Equipment Roof Flange Assembly Roof Flange An optional roof flange assembly can be used with flat roof applications as shown in Figure 9 5 This roof flange assembly uses 3 PVC tubing Assembly fittings and roof flange with gasketing The installer must assure a water tight installation when using a flange of this design A 2 1 2 circular hole should be drilled through the roofline of the the enclosure or building if it has a flat roof The roof surface should be clean and swept of all debris The flange should be centered over the hole that has been drilled A generous bead of RTV or silicone sealent should be applied to the circumfernce of the ponts shown in Figure 9 5 t 58 0D 55 Sample hbng 5 Towards niet Liquid tight compression finge pe a N F Sampl tube ambient sensor aceway Feed amben sensor cable through here Roof fange A id Flange gasket Figure 9 5 Roof Flange Assembly 9 8 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Roof Flange Assembly The flange design also has four holes that can be used to secure the flange to the roof surface by the use of carriage bolts washers and nuts The length of the carriage bolts depends on the thickness of the roofline Figure 9 6 shows a picture of the roof flange that is used with this assembly Figure 9 6 Securing the Roof F
269. t temperature zero to 3 C Send set amb temp zero 3 Receive set amb temp zero 3 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration baro mass coef This command reports the current barometric mass coefficient The following example reports that the barometric mass coefficient is 0 000540 Send baro mass coef Receive baro mass coef 0 000540 set baro mass coef value This command sets the barometric mass coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the barometric mass coefficient to 0 000630 Send set baro mass coef 0 000630 Receive set baro mass coef 0 000630 ok baro span This command reports the current barometric pressure span recorded at the time of calibration The following example reports that the barometric span is 1 0 Send baro span Receive baro span 1 0000 set baro span value This command requires to manually specifying the span value for the barometric pressure span where value is a floating point representation of barometric pressure span The following example successfully sets the barometric span to 1 023 Send set baro span 1 023 Receive set baro span 1 023 ok beta th This command reports the current reference beta threshold for the detector The following example reports that the beta threshold is 440 Send beta th Receive beta th 440 set beta th value
270. tate The following example sets the digital output channel 4 to state 11 Send set dout 4 11 open Receive set dout 4 11 open ok dtoa channel This command reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 Digital to Analog converters according to Table B 13 The following example shows that the D A 1 is 97 7 full scale Send dtoa 1 Receive dtoa 1 97 7 Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular output and that output is selected the value will be 0 0 a All channel ranges are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Table B 13 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments Dto A Function Range 1 Voltage Output PM 2 Voltage Output AVG PM 3 Voltage Output Flow 4 Voltage Output Ambient Temperature 5 Voltage Output Flow Temperature 6 Voltage Output Ambient Relative Humidity 7 Current Output PM 8 Current Output AVG PM 9 Current Output Flow 10 Current Output Ambient Temperature 11 Current Output Flow Temperature 12 Current Output Ambient Relative Humidity Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 53 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 54 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual list din list dout These commands report the current selection for the digital inputs or the digital outputs in the format Output no Index number variable name active state The active state
271. tatus is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MD03 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 1230000000 lt SP gt 002 lt SP gt 1 T t Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 56814 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP T t d Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 1230000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units The measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular mode will report a value of 0 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurements reported in response to DA command Operating and Error Status PM Mass Volumetric Flow Ambient Temperature Flow Temperature Ambient RH Flow Pressure Vacuum Pressure Barometric Pressure Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands The following 9 measurements reported in response to DA command for the Model 50147 include Thermo Fisher Scientific D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Operating status Service Mode On 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 1 Maintenance Local 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 Pump Off 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 7 0 Heater Off 0 0 0 0 1 10 0 7 0 Filter Chang
272. te control with actual and standard conditions concentration data output e Processor controlled calibration of all sensors e Detector Life 10 years e C 14 activity below USA authorized limit values shipped as non hazardous material under Code UN2911 easy handling of the source and instrument No license is needed in most countries For details of the analyzer s principle of operation and product specifications see the following topics e Principle of Operation on page 1 3 e Specifications on page 1 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this continuous ambient particulate monitor We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Thermo service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this instrument For more information on servicing see the Servicing chapter The Model 5014 uses the radiometric principle of beta attenuation through a known area on a fibrous filter tape to continuously detect the mass of deposited ambient particles Additionally the Model 5014 measures alpha particle emissions directly from the ambient aerosol being sampled and excludes negative mass artifacts from the daughter nuclides of radon gas decay to achieve a refined mass measurement Simultaneous refined mass measurements of sampled particulate on the filter tape and sample volume measurement provide
273. ted on the sample filter during mass measurement Some of the radioactive daughter nuclides are also an emitter of beta rays interfering with the measurement of the particulate mass The effect of the interference is generally greatest during e The first 90 minutes after a filter change until the radiological equilibrium on the filter is reached e Periods of rapidly changing Radon gas levels e When the activity of the C 14 source is very low Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Principle of Operation 1 2 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual In the Model 50142 a discrimination technique is applied whereby the count rate created by the airborne natural activity is measured and corrected for in the gross particulate count rate This eliminates any interference and enables the possibility to use a C 14 source with reduced activity The ability to count the potential interferences of Radon gas stems from the use of a proportional detector which enables the Model 5014 to measure both B and a particles The proportional detector is filled with a rigid counting gas and has a life time of more than 10 years with a lt 100 uCi C 14 source Any deterioration of the detector performance will be identified before it has an effect on the particulate measurement by the continuous plateau check procedure performed during operation The sample flow rate is controlled by means of a proportional solenoid valve
274. tes N x f parse a 32 bit floating point number 4 bytes c parse an 8 bit signed number 1 byte C parse an 8 bit unsigned number 1 byte n parse a 16 bit signed number 2 bytes N parse a 16 bit unsigned number 2 bytes m parse a 24 bit signed number 3 bytes M parse a 24 bit unsigned number 3 bytes l parse a 32 bit signed number 4 bytes L parse a 32 bit unsigned number 4 bytes Thermo Fisher Scientific Format Specifier for Thermo Fisher Scientific Erec Layout Text Value String Value Source C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out the resulting value is to be divided by 104d Thus the 16 bit field OxFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier n3 as the number 0 058 The subsequent lines in the erec layout response describe the appearance of the full panel The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two columns of lines Each line is composed of three major components 1 a text field 2 a value field and 3 a button None of these three components is required The text field contains statically displayed text The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a erec command It also displays though background changes alarm status The button when pressed triggers input from either a dialog
275. the Preventive Maintenance chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Unhook Connector from Measurement Interface Board Beta 1 Detector Assembly Replacement A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Assembly Replacement Unhook Tubing from Measurement Head Unfasten Screws 4 Unhook Tubing from Rear Panel Figure 7 15 Replacing the Proportional Valve Use the following procedure to replace the detector assembly Figure 7 16 Equipment Required Detector assembly Hex driver 4 mm Safety glasses WARNING The detector assembly should be replaced by a qualified technician knowledgeable in dealing with radiation precautions By removing the detector assembly the C 14 radioactive source is partially exposed Safety glassed must be worn during this replacement procedure The amount of C 14 meets the USNRC regulations as an exempt amount of radioactive source lt 100 XCi A Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Detector Assembly Replacement The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified representatives amp If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION The detector window is very fragile Handle with great care and do not wipe or touch the window Furthermore do not touch the solder cable connection electrode with your bare fingers The oils from your skin c
276. the C 14 radioactive source is partially exposed Safety glasses must be worn during this replacement procedure The amount of C 14 meets the USNRC regulations as an exempt amount of radioactive source lt 100 pCi The detector window is very fragile Handle with great care and do not wipe or touch the window Furthermore do not touch the solder cable connection electrode with your bare fingers The oils from your skin can damage the detector Safety glasses must be worn while replacing the detector assembly If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other external fittings 4 Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component 4 Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully 4 Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other
277. the current baud rate is 9600 baud Send baud Receive baud 9600 set baud rate rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 This command sets the instrument baud rate to rate The following example sets the instrument s baud rate to 9600 Note After the command is sent the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument A Send set baud 9600 Receive set baud 9600 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration dhcp This command reports the current state of use of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP as on or off DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the instrument automatically The following example shows that DHCP is on Send dhcp Receive dhcp on set dhcp onoff onoff on off This command enables on and disables off the DHCP service When DHCP is set to on the instrument gets the IP address the netmask address and the gateway address from a DHCP server When DHCP is set to off the instrument gets these addresses from system memory The following example sets the DHCP service to on Note If DHCP is changed from on to off and then the IP address the netmask address or the gateway address is changed you must cycle power to the instrument before the change takes effect Until you cycle the power the address assigned by the DHCP server will still be used and reported as
278. the current sample mass reading alpha counts and beta counts Note A mass value will only be calculated when the flowrate is within acceptable limits However when in Service Mode a mass value will be calculated if the pump is turned OFF a 3 56 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific CRn Analog Input Readings Analog Input Voltages Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Detector Status PE EN PUHE o Bone The CRn screen read only displays the current CRn reading e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt CRn ERED CH wee Wi mri DAA var sd be hb Bedi bent Phi The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the 8 user scaled analog readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Readings Ea ra Fs Py tit Mra mid LE The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the 8 raw analog voltage readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Voltages Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Diagnostics Menu Digital Inputs Relay States Test Analog Outputs 3 58 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual DH pikari Ce a E S a EA The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs Pull ups are provided on all of
279. the inputs so if nothing they will read 1 if an input is brought to ground it will read 0 e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Digital Inputs Ch iy Poppin pH Tied Pv ig BSR ELT E The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off 0 The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Relay States e Press to toggle and set the relay state to open or closed for the selected digital output Py PHT pH Tied BSR ELI ik E The Test Analog Outputs menu is used to set each of the analog output channels to zero or full scale Channel choices include all analog outputs 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Wi rnd Set Analog Outputs The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to zero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts and reset returns the output to normal operation The analog outputs are returned to normal operation upon exiting this screen The following example shows the screen when all analog outputs are set to normal operating mode e Inthe Main Menu choose
280. tific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration filter time This command reports the next date and time of the filter tape change The following example reports that the date and time is January 1 2008 6 12 pm Send filter time Receive filter time 01Jano8 18 12 set filter time dd mm yyyy hh mm ss dd day mm month yy year hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the next filter tape change The following example sets the filter time to October 1 2008 11 32 pm Send set filter time 10 01 2008 23 32 Receive set filter time 10 01 2008 23 32 ok flow target This command reports the current flow The following example reports that the flow is 16 0 LPM Send flow target Receive flow target 16 00 set flow target value This command sets the flow to value where value is a floating point number representation of flow between 1 to 20 LPM The following example sets the flow to 16 67 LPM Send set flow target 16 67 Receive set flow target 16 67 ok ht control This command reports the current status of the heater off RH threshold or temp threshold The following example reports that the heater is RH threshold Send ht control Receive ht control RH set ht control selection selection off rh temp Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 37 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration This command sets the heater to off RH threshold or temp threshold Th
281. time To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the selected soft key within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration of the new label Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations All items under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot be assigned soft keys A Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Firmware Overview Alphanumeric Entry Screen Entry Line gt Keyboard gt Ea MATTE Firmware Overview 3 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Programmable Soft Key Labels The alphanumeric entry screen is used to enter strings consisting of letters numbers and other characters The cursor may be positioned within the entry line using the Ce Jand _ keys Ifa character is entered over an existing character that character will be overwritten Use the Cr and keys to switch between the entry line and the keyboard as well as to move within the keyboard To select a character to add to the string use the cursor keys to position the cursor over the desired character and then press the key to add that character to the entry line On the right side of the keyb
282. tion to actual or standard 3 20 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Standard Pressure Thermo Fisher Scientific Datalogging Settings Operation Instrument Controls Menu Wi mid The Standard Pressure screen is used to set the standard pressure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Volumetric Conditions gt Pressure gt Standard The Series instruments include a built in datalogging capability as a standard feature The operator is allowed to create two different types of records which for historical reasons are named lrecs and srecs Each record can contain up to 32 different fields or data items and records can be created at user defined intervals ranging from 1 to 60 minutes Record generation is tied to the instrument s real time clock For example if the logging period for srecs is set to 30 minutes a new srec will be generated on every hour and every half hour 10 00 10 30 11 00 Lrecs and srecs function independent of each other So for example an srec containing just the current PM level could be generated every 5 minutes while an lrec containing a full set of diagnostic data could be generated once every hour The analyzer s computer system includes three megabytes of flash memory which is enough to store a full lrec containing 32 data items and a full srec containing 32 items once each minute for a week gt 20 000 total records If logging is limit
283. tive humidity the differential pressure across the orifice and the vacuum under the filter tape Title Bar gt 3 Status Bar lt Status Bar Icons m g Mass Sensor Data Run The Mass Sensor Data Run screen displays the real time beta counts during Screen attenuation and the initial beta counts from a fresh filter spot Title Bar Status Bar agp 3 8 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu Main Menu The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration appears above the Main Menu and submenus in every screen The Service menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode cc see Service Mode later in this chapter e Use t Jand to move the cursor up and down e Press to make a selection e Press M to return to the Main Menu or _ _ to return to the Run screen Range Menu The Range menu allows the operator to select the concentration units PM standard ranges and to set the custom ranges e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation Range Menu Concentration Units The Concentration Units screen defines how the particles concentration readings are express
284. to Table B 3 The following example sets the lrec output format to ASCII with text Send set lrec format 1 Receive set lrec format 1 ok Table B 3 Record Output Formats Format Output Format 0 ASCII no text 1 ASCII with text 2 Binary data lrec layout srec layout erec layout These commands report the layout string indicating the data formats for data that is sent out in response to the lrec srec erec and related commands For details on how to interpret the strings see Record Layout Definition later in this appendix Send lrec layout Receive lrec layout s s lx f f f f f f f f SF lx 1x t D L fFFFFFFFF A A flags pm baro vac pflow ambrh srh ambtemp stemp fvol dflg aflg lrec mem size srec mem size Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging These commands report the number of Irecs and srecs that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for lrecs and srecs The following example shows that 1075 blocks were reserved for lrecs and the maximum number of Irecs that can be stored in memory is 241979 Memory allocation can be changed using the malloc command Send lrec mem size Receive lrec mem size 241979 recs 1075 blocks lrec per srec per These commands report the lrecs and srecs logging period The following example shows that the srec logging period is 5 minutes Send srec per Receive srec
285. to calibrate the pressure board assembly Equipment Required Manometer 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Wacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres Adjust the barometer pressure span by entering the actual barometric pressure value Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 Return to the Pres Vacuum Calibration choose Vac Flow gt Flow Pres Span Calibrate the flow pressure span according to the following a Place digital manometer on bench b Turn on manometer and allow to self calibrate Do not move manometer while self calibrating c After zeroing the digital manometer connect the side of the manometer to the Delta P X port on the rear panel d Connect the side of the manometer to the Delta P X port on the rear panel e Open both Delta P X and X toggle valves to open flow through the manometer f Cal Flow Pres Span by entering the actual value read by the manometer g Press to save value h Turn off the manometer this meter does not have an automatic turn off feature 3 Return to the Pres Vacuum Calibration choose Vac Flow gt Vac Pres Span Calibrate the vacuum pressure span according to the following Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing Analog Output Testing Analog Output Testing 7 18 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual a Use an acceptable vacuu
286. truction Manual 7 39 Servicing LCD Module Replacement 7 40 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the center of the instrument 5 Replace the LCD module by following the previous steps in reverse Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another After replacing the LCD screen the contrast may need to be reset If the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible
287. ts anti daca tte 2 22 Shutdown siec A 2 22 Important IPS n id aO NNA E 2 22 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 1 25 eee a ane 0 ORY oo er Pt TPR ot A TEES OR eee 3 1 PS DURE Se ee accor ree celestial Ss cae esa aac oid area cath stone 3 2 SOU vas a E E e ta pret sceeas ON G 3 3 Alphanumeric Entry Screen sssssesesessesesesrsessrsrrsrrrerererrerresrseeees 3 4 Firmware WC Ver vl CW ior ohecpedel bat ancient sonnu etira iiaa iaioa 3 4 Power Up Crec tad 3 6 RUB a a A T 3 6 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual vii Contents Ambient Conditions Run Screen coooononnccnnoncnonnncnnnnnannnacinnacinnns 3 7 Sample Conditions Run cren ici 3 8 Mass Sensor Data Run Screen ococccnnnnnnonnnnnononnonannanonononocnonanna nacos 3 8 Main Mellado ada 3 9 Range Menu a a A a 3 9 Concentration Units coonoooouoncnonocnnnnnnananononoonononnnnonannoonononnnnononnnconos 3 10 RE A A A AAA 3 10 A A iiitecogvereaet ARIAT 3 12 CUSCO RANES iii 3 12 PAPEL OUTTA nnen nn tunity aaa r aA cenit aE Saa a EAEE 3 13 24 Ho ur Average Start a 3 13 Calibration Factors Men s ds is dad 3 13 A A as Hecate aa aN eae caesar tees eat 3 14 PIECES ds 3 14 Instrument Controls Menta 3 15 Set Flow Pump oneni a a a aas 3 15 AA A A A A ME ECs e ha 3 15 WPAN sds conads tua reaa asthe casa caesaadttanegesmeacosdets 3 16 Serena ia te 3 16 Controlan dile 3 16 IN A aia EEE 3 17 Temperature Threshold reli 3 17 Filter Tape Control nai de is an aA Ra 3 17
288. uction Manual 3 79 Operation Service Menu Thermal Mass Coefficient The Thermal Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to view and set the thermal coefficient using manual calibration mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Thermal Coefficient rep gies PLP Vacuum Mass Coefficient The Vacuum Mass coefficient screen allows the user to view and set the vacuum coefficient using manual calibration mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Vacuum Coefficient rip priori Piet Barometer Mass The Barometer Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to view and set the Coefficient barometer coefficient using manual calibration mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Baro Coefficient 3 80 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Mass Coefficient The Mass Coefficient submenu allows the user to view and set the mass coefficient using manual or auto mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass Coefficient Auto Mass Coefficient The Auto Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to conduct a mass foil calibration Note After pressing a series of screens will walk you through the mass foil calibration procedure For details see Auto Mass Coefficient on page 4 9 A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass gt Auto Manual
289. ues that DO NOT compromise regulatory approvals for this instrument those values can be adjusted at this point e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors PM Background The PM Background screen allows the user to manually adjust the PM Intercept The PM concentration based on the SET BKG TO is displayed to facilitate the setting The PM concentration displayed in the Run portion of the screen is NOT affected by the SET BKG until the value is saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt PM Bkg PM Coefficient The PM Coefficient screen allows the user to manually adjust the PM coefficient The PM concentration based on the SET COEF TO is displayed to facilitate setting The PM concentration displayed in the Run portion of the screen is NOT affected by the SET COEF until the value is saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt PM Coef 3 14 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Instrument Controls The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items that may be Menu selected to control various instrument operational parameters The firmware controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument functions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Set Flow Pump The Set Flow Pump menu allows the user to manually adjust the flow values and to change the operating state of the pump to ON or OFF e Inthe Main M
290. umber with leading zeros or leading spaces if required e g instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or lt SP gt lt SP gt 1 The default instrument address is 14 The instrument address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link and MODBUS commands This can be set via the front panel The instrument address is represented by lt address gt in the examples throughout this document Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C Link protocol A The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document lt CR gt is abbreviation for Carriage Return ASCII code 0x0D lt STX gt is abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 lt SP gt is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of a Gesytec command lt STX gt Command text lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt Command text lt CR gt Each command is framed by control characters lt STX gt at the start and terminated with either lt ETX gt or lt CR gt If a command is terminated with lt ETX gt then two additional characters lt BCC gt is attached after lt ETX gt This is the block checksum Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt may be added to the command to prevent processing invalid commands Thermo Fisher Scientific Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt Gesytec Commands Instrument Control Command
291. ument perform any necessary calibrations prior to final site installation and familiarize the user with the menu structure Use the following procedure to perform the bench acceptance test Equipment Required Model 5014 Power Cord Ambient Temperature RH Cable Assembly Vacuum Pump Assembly Flow Adapter Assembly NIST traceable Thermometer NIST traceable Hygrometer NIST traceable Barometer NIST traceable Manometer s NIST traceable Volumetric Flow Transfer Standard Do not use the heated sample tube assembly at this point 9 After unpacking the instrument place the Model 5014 and accessories onto a table or bench located within a stable indoor environment Remove the side panel cover and inspect the filter tape Leave cover OFF until after acceptance testing has been completed Note Prior to continuing with acceptance testing the instrumentation and accessories should have sufficient time to equilibrate to room temperature due to temperature variations during shipping and or storage A 10 Following a sufficient equilibration period connect the power cord to the rear of the instrument and to a properly grounded power supply Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Note If the Model 50147 turns ON at this point set the power switch to the OFF position and then proceed A 11 Connect the green vacuum tube to the pump intake and to the vacuum port mounted on the rear panel of the
292. ument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Addr Netmask The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet on which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask dm ae e po p CRITE a Default Gateway The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on 3 38 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Gateway aa Ea MATTE Host Name The Host Name screen is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Host Name Pa E ES TID oP Te bei 4 a
293. und 19 Ground 20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal 21 Keypad Row 2 Input 22 Keypad Row 1 Input 23 Keypad Row 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 27 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 34 24V LCD DATA J2 1 LDO_5V LCD Signal 2 LD1_5V LCD Signal 3 LD2_5V LCD Signal 4 LD3_5V LCD Signal 5 LCD_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal 6 LFLM_5V LCD Signal 7 NC 8 LLP_5V LCD Signal 9 LCLK_5V LCD Signal 10 5V 11 Ground 6 18 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description 25V LCD Bias Voltage Ground KEYBOARD J3 mo N O wo A WO N Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Keypad Col 4 Select LCD BACKLIGHT J4 ome 5V Supply NC Ground Table 6 6 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label EXPANSION 1 0 Reference Designator J1 Pin gt OOO N on A WW N gt gt o gt gt gt gt al gt ow N Signal Description Analog Voltage Input 1 Analog Voltage Input 2 Analog Voltage Input 3 Ground Analog Voltage Input 4 Analog Voltage Input 5 Analog Voltage Input 6 Ground Analog Voltage Input 7
294. ur offset value Pressure Vacuum There are three pressure sensors that can be calibrated however the Calibration primary sensor to be calibrated is the barometric pressure sensor Both the vacuum sensor and pressure flow sensors are re zeroed automatically with every filter tape change Barometer Pressure eran Using a NIST traceable barometer measure the barometric pressure and Calibration convert as necessary in units of millimetres of mercury mmHg Use the SPAN feature from the barometric calibration submenu 4 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibrate Vacuum Flow Zero Calibrate Vacuum Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Span Calibration Calibration Procedure Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more Repeat as necessary to within 2 mmHg The Calibrate Vacuum Flow Zero screen calibrates the vacuum flow sensor at zero value This is done automatically with every filter tape change However if for any reason this needs to be done proceed to the following screen below to execute a zeroing filter tape change The Calibrate Vacuum Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the vacuum sensor calibration span point To calibrate the vacuum sensor zero a digital manometer capable of measuring up to 100 mmHg to the AP port on the rear panel Then push the toggle switch on the right inward to open see Figure 4 1 The manometer reading can now be
295. ure 7 11 Equipment Required Motherboard Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Interface Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Remove the digital output board See the Digital Output Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 4 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 5 Using the nut driver remove the six standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 12 6 Pop the motherboard off of the support bracket and remove the motherboard 7 To install the motherboard follow the previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter all ranges Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Figure 7 13 Equipment Required Measurement interface board Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of stati
296. ure over a range of 600 to 800 mmHg 80 to 106 kilo Pascals kPa and readable to the nearest 1 mmHg At least once a year this barometer should be calibrated to within 5 mmHg of a NIST traceable barometer of known accuracy e Flow rate Transfer Standard FTS measurement equipment capable of calibrating or verifying the volumetric flow rate measurement with an accuracy of 2 percent This flow rate standard must be a separate stand alone device It must have its own certification and be traceable to a NIST primary standard for volume or flow rate Dry piston meters and bubble flow meters should only be used under controlled laboratory conditions Ambient field measurements should use a NIST traceable low pressure drop orifice venturi flow meter such as BGI Delta Cal or a Streamline Pro Model SX Kit 2 25 L min e A relative humidity RH standard capable of measuring in the range of 35 75 RH readable to the nearest 0 5 RH and accurate to within 2 RH Prior to calibration be sure the Model 5014 is operating properly The Model 50147 s internal diagnostics makes this a quick and simple process Turn on the instrument and allow it to stabilize for one hour prior to calibrating If you are receiving this instrument for the first time the optional acceptance testing in the Installation chapter should also be reviewed If the internal flow temperature sensor requires calibration the dynamic heating system should be turned OF
297. urpose of heating the sample is to reduce particle bound water and to decrease the relative humidity RH of the sample stream This is done to reduce positive artifact measurement that can potentially occur as a result of condensation on the filter tape or conditions of elevated humidity The heater is controlled by the CPU and the power applied is proportional to the conditions At the location where the sampling tube attaches to the Model 5014 instrument case a radial insulated tube joins the sampling tube to the collection chamber The particulate is drawn onto the glass fiber filter tape between the proportional detector and the C beta source Here the beta beam passes upwards through the filter tape and accumulated particulate layer The intensity of the beta beam is attenuated with the increasing mass Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 1 5 Introduction Principle of Operation 1 6 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual load resulting in a reduced beta intensity measured by the proportional detector From a continuously integrated count rate the mass on the filter tape is calculated During sampling the mass on the filter spot is always known and the rate of particulate accumulation is observed A continuous measurement of the flow rate determines the sample volume A proportional valve is used to maintain the sample flow rate at its nominal value From both integrated sample volume and mass detection the particulate concentration
298. urrently selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm al ed The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A Not all of the I O available in the instrument are brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital input action Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or 88 8 y op normally closed Pi Ea Cdra MT WH mid PS PHP L Pi AG are Instrument Action The Instrument Action submenu allows the user to choose the instrument action that is assigned to the selected digital i
299. used to display the voltage readings on the I O expansion board This menu is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt I O Board CH Ctr Detector Board Voltages The Detector Board screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Detector Board a Ph dm porr PPP L E E WH nid RH Temperature The RH Temperature screen read only displays the current relative humidity and temperature readings The board temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt RH Temperature Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Diagnostics Menu Pressure Vacuum The Pressure Vacuum screen read only displays the current pressure readings The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer The vacuum is the amount of vacuum under the filter tape The flow pressure is the pressure differential across the orifice e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Pressure Vacuum Flow The Flow screen read only displays the current sample flow reading The flow is measured by the internal pressure board sensors e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Flow Detector Status The Detector Status screen read only displays
300. utput Zero 0 Value Full Scale 100 Value PM Zero 0 Range Setting AVG PM Zero 0 Range Setting Barometer Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Vacuum User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Choose Signal to Output 3 46 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Output Zero 0 Value Full Scale 100 Value Flow Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Ambient RH User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Sample RH User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Ambient Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Board Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flow Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flow Vol User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Beta User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Beta Raw User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Alpha Raw User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Mass 200 5 000 Beta Zero 0 65 000 External Alarms 0 7 000 Beta Ref 0 65 000 The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a list of the analog output signal choices Choices are grouped into three categories Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed This allows the user to sel
301. vac pres zero 1 002 ok vac pres zero This command reports the vacuum zero for the detector at the time of calibration The following example reports that the vacuum pressure zero is 0 3 Send vac pres zero Receive vac pres zero 0 3 set vf pres cal def This command resets the vacuum and flow pressure calibration to their default values Send set vf pres cal def Receive set vf pres cal def ok push button do me 1 down menu 2 en ri 3 enter right 4 he ru help run le up left button do down en enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up 1 2 3 4 These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons The numbers represent the front panel soft keys from left to right Send push enter Receive push enter ok isc iscreen These commands retrieve the framebuffer data used for the display on the iSeries instrument It is 19200 bytes in size 2 bits per pixel 4 pixels per byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters The data is sent in RLE encoded form to save time in transmission It is sent as a type 5 binary C Link response with no checksum Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive OxFF bytes The following c code will expand the incoming data void int i j k unsigned char far sc4bpp sc2bpp scree
302. ve assembly using the available push connect fitting Note This step can also be delayed until after the zero air delivery tube and T fitting are installed at the sample intake a d At the sample inlet attach the stainless steel T fitting to the sample downtube and tighten the swagelok fitting with Teflon ferrules do not overtighten these ferrules e Snake the green vacuum tubing downwards towards the rear valve assembly and attach to Port 1 of the valve If this is a field installation proper water sealants should be used to avoid any leakage into the instrument Figure 10 8 Plumbing Diagram 10 8 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures SHARP Optics Assembly Installation SHARP Optics Use the following procedure for SHARP external valve installation Assembly Installation Remove the SHARP Optics Assembly port protection caps and plugs 2 Align the radius tube adapter with the open port on the bottom of the optics assembly as per Figure 10 9 and gently push down and then screw down the two tabs using the captive hardware Figure 10 9 Optics Installation 3 Connect the cable assembly from the rear panel of the Optical assembly and secure it to the optics connector that was installed in Step 3 of this procedure and as shown in Figure 10 10 Figure 10 10 Connecting the Optics to the Optics Connector Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instru
303. w min 16 00 LPM Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms set alarm flow min value set alarm flow max value These commands set the flow alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing flow alarm limits in liters per minute liters per hour The following example sets the flow alarm maximum value to 17 34 LPM Send set alarm flow max 17 34 Receive set alarm flow max 17 34 ok alarm flow pres min alarm flow pres max These commands report the current flow pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the flow pressure alarm minimum value is 10 0 mmHg Send alarm flow pres min Receive alarm flow pres min 10 0 mmHg set alarm flow pres min value set alarm flow pres max value These commands set the flow pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing flow pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The following example sets the flow pressure alarm maximum value to 100 0 mmHg Send set alarm flow pres max 100 0 Receive set alarm flow pres max 100 0 ok alarm flow temp min alarm flow temp max This command reports the current flow temperature alarm maximum value setting The following example reports that the flow temperature alarm maximum value is 20 0 C Send alarm flow temp max Receive alarm flow temp max 20 0 degC set
304. w temperature should be as stable as possible and therefore the instrument should have the heating system turned off and the instrument should be allowed to equilibrate to shelter or ambient temperature If the Model 5014 Beta is mounted within an ambient shelter then the most stable time of day to perform a mass calibration would be either early morning or late afternoon A The preferred method of mass coefficient calibration is the Auto Mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass Coefficient ERED CH PT it H WH mht PSPS Py AG Lf bi The Auto Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to conduct a mass calibration of the measurement head and will walk you through the process Use the following procedure to conduct a mass calibration 1 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass gt Auto 2 Enter the SPAN foil value e g 1 328 ug using the keypad and press to save the foil value and to open the bench The beta attenuation chamber should now open WH nied Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 4 9 Calibration Calibration Procedure 3 Cut break the filter tape and remove from the bench Then insert the Foil Holder from the calibration kit and press while maintaining a slight sideward pressure on the filter holder 4 Insert the Null Zero foil with the label side up and press to proceed with the foil calibration or press to stop the foil Wi papi
305. will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query The other outputs follow toward the high end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the instrument as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Quantity of Outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Byte Count 1 Byte N Output Status N Byte N N or N 1 N Quantity of Out
306. y alarm minimum value is 35 0 Send alarm amb rh min Receive alarm amb rh min 35 0 set alarm amb rh min value set alarm amb rh max value These commands set the ambient relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing ambient relative humidity alarm limits in percent The Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual B 11 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 12 Model 5014 Beta Instruction Manual following example sets the ambient relative humidity alarm maximum value to 55 Send set alarm amb rh max 55 Receive set alarm amb rh max 55 ok alarm amb temp min alarm amb temp max These commands report the current ambient temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the ambient temperature alarm minimum value is 4 0 C Send alarm amb temp min Receive alarm amb temp min 4 0 degC set alarm amb temp min value set alarm amb temp max value These commands set the ambient temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing ambient temperature alarm limits in C The following example sets the ambient temperature alarm maximum value to 38 C Send set alarm amb temp max 38 0 Receive set alarm amb temp max 38 0 ok alarm baro pres min alarm baro pres max These commands report the current barometric pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following
307. y equipment currently connected to the analyzer A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt RS 232 485 Selection Instrument ID The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID number The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more instruments of the same model are connected to one computer Valid instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The Model 5014 has a default instrument ID of 14 For more information about the instrument ID see Appendix B C Link Protocol or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Instrument ID Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50147 Beta Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Gesytec Serial Nunber Communication Protocol The Gesytec Serial Number screen is used to set the serial number for the Gesytec protocol The Gesytec serial number defaults to zero For more information about the serial number see Appendix D Gesytec BH Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Gesytec Serial No The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the protocol for serial communications Possible choices include C Link MODBUS Gesytec and
308. y lrec to sp set copy srec to sp set copy stream to sp These commands copy the current contents of the lrec srec or streaming data list into the scratch pad sp These commands are useful in easy modification of current lrec srec or streaming data lists The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list of lrecs into the scratch pad Send set copy lrec to sp Receive set copy lrec to sp ok data treatment lrec data treatment srec These commands report the current selection of data treatment for concentrations in the lrecs or srecs The following example reports the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send data treatment lrec Receive data treatment lrec min set data treatment lrec string set data treatment srec string string cur avg min max These commands set the data treatment to current average minimum or maximum for the concentration values recorded in the Irecs or srecs The following example sets the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send set data treatment lrec min Receive set data treatment lrec min ok Mo
309. y set for use The following example sets the average PM concentration alarm maximum value to 10000 mg m Send set alarm conc avg pm max 10000 Receive set alarm conc avg pm max 10000 ok alarm conc inst pm min alarm conc inst pm max These commands report the current 24 hour instant PM concentration alarm minimum and maximum values setting The following example reports that the instant PM concentration minimum is 100 pg m Send alarm conc inst pm min Receive alarm conc inst pm min 1 000E 02 pg m3 set alarm conc inst pm min value set alarm conc inst pm max value These commands set the 24 hour instant PM concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the instant PM concentration alarm maximum value to 10000 ug m Send set alarm conc inst pm max 10000 Receive set alarm conc inst pm max 10000 ok alarm filter tape status This command reports the status of the filter tape as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the filter tape status is OK Send alarm filter tape status Receive alarm filter tape status ok alarm flow min alarm flow max These commands report the current flow alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the flow alarm minimum value is 16 0 LPM Send alarm flow min Receive alarm flo

Model 5014i - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents